Quarterlytics / DFS Furniture plc

DFS Furniture plc

dfs.l · LSE
Claim this profile
Ticker dfs.l
Exchange LSE
Sector
Industry
Employees 4722
← All annual reports
FY2018 Annual Report · DFS Furniture plc
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
A sofa for everyone

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018

Welcome

We are the leading sofa and  
living room furniture specialists

Strategic report 

1-37

Highlights 
Our business 
Chair’s statement 
Market overview 
Our business model 
Our strategy for growth 
Risks and uncertainties 
Chief Executive’s report 
Chief Executive Officer Designate’s remarks 
Key performance indicators 
Financial review 
Corporate responsibility  

Corporate governance 

38-89

Board of Directors 
Directors’ report 
Corporate governance statement 
Audit Committee report 
Nomination Committee report 
Directors’ remuneration report 
Statement of Directors’ responsibilities  
Independent auditor’s report 

1
2
4
6
8
10
12
18
23
24
26
32

38
40
42
50
56
58
83
84

Financial statements 

90-125

Consolidated income statement 
90
Consolidated statement of comprehensive income  91
92
Consolidated balance sheet 
93
Consolidated statement of changes in equity 
94
Consolidated cash flow statement 
95
Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
118
Company balance sheet 
119
Company statement of changes in equity 
120
Notes to the Company financial statements 
122
Financial history 
123
Shareholder information 

The three ‘S’s that make us different:
We have hard-to-match competitive  
advantages that are sustainable in the long term.

Scale
Our vertically integrated model, particularly utilised 
within our DFS brand, brings advantages in cost, 
customer service and responsiveness. 

Our unparalleled scale – we have a Group market share 
more than three times any other sofa retailer – gives us 
operating leverage across the value chain.

 See pages 6-9 for our market and business model

Specialism
Our Group’s almost 50 years of expertise allow us to 
recruit, train and retain high calibre colleagues, who 
provide expert guidance to customers.

To complement our Group’s own brands we are the 
furniture partner of choice for lifestyle brands, giving us 
broad appeal across customer segments.

 See pages 34-35 for our people

Shareholder returns
We have a clear strategy and a proven ability to achieve 
above-market growth across the economic cycle, with 
our flexible cost base allowing us to respond to 
challenging market conditions.

Our low capital employed and negative working capital 
yield attractive shareholder returns.

 See pages 26-31 for our financial performance

 
1

Highlights

Summary  
of the year

Financial

Group revenue

£870.5m

+14.1% (FY17: £762.7m)

Revenue before acquisitions

Underlying EBITDA2

£747.7m

-2.0% (FY17: £762.7m)

£76.1m

-7.6% (FY17: £82.4m)

Underlying profit before tax 
excluding amortisation of  
brand names

£38.3m

-23.7% (FY17: £50.2m)

Profit before tax

£25.8m

-48.5% (FY17: £50.1m)

Final dividend held at

7.5p

(FY17: 7.5p) giving total ordinary 
dividend of 11.2p for the year  
(FY17: 11.2p)

Underlying earnings per share

Earnings per share

14.0p

-25.1% (FY17: 18.7p)

Operational

8.9p

-52.4% (FY17: 18.7p)

Leverage3

2.1x

(FY17: 1.75x)

• Operational and strategic momentum preserved despite fourth quarter

environment

• Continued strong growth in Group online revenues

• Successful development of sector-first augmented reality and “complete

at home” technologies for Group websites

• Sofology acquired - trading positively with good momentum on releasing

synergies

• Further improvement in DFS brand appeal, while partnership brands

have grown well

• Three new 10-15,000 sq.ft. DFS stores opened and trading successfully

plus small store DFS trials opened in Chelmsford and Guildford

• Completion of UK CDC network, leading to lower costs per order

• International development: Spain trading profitably; Netherlands TV

marketing trial continues

Post Purchase NPS1

84.9%

(2017: 85.2%)

Established Customer NPS1

35.8%

(2017: 34.2%)

Visit www.dfscorporate.co.uk  
for more information

1.  Net Promoter Score. See page 25
2.  See page 96 for definition of non-underlying items
3.  Leverage is net debt/underlying EBITDA

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 20182

Our business

A sofa for  
everyone

DFS is the leading living 
room furniture retail group 
in the UK. Although we are 
most famous for our DFS 
operations – the UK’s 
largest and most profitable 
sofa retailer – we are also 
the proud owners of the 
Sofology, Dwell and Sofa 
Workshop retail businesses.

By trading through four retailer brands we are 
able to offer tailored customer propositions, 
with each brand business unit appealing 
differently to targeted customer segments. 
However, to help us offer customers great 
value for money and to grow our profitability 
we are working to reduce costs through 
collaboration across our Group, in particular 
by benefitting from the scale of DFS. 
Critically, we will only seek such Group 
synergies where we are satisfied we can 
maintain the distinctiveness and integrity of 
each brand’s customer proposition.

While our DFS business is the clear UK 
market leader and drives the majority of 
Group revenues and profits, Sofology,  
Dwell and Sofa Workshop are each on a 
growth journey, and are making clear 
progress each year towards national scale. 
We believe that as they mature they will 
represent an increasingly important part  
of the Group and will generate attractive 
returns in future.

Total Group employees

5,500+

Total Group retail stores

232

DFS % of  
Group revenue

79%

DFS is the leading retailer of sofas and 
living room furniture in the UK. It has a 
leading ecommerce platform operating 
in English, Spanish and Dutch, and also 
124 showrooms in the UK, Ireland, the 
Netherlands and Spain. In addition to its 
showrooms DFS operates 20 Customer 
Distribution Centre warehouses offering 
an efficient last-mile two-man delivery 
service.

The DFS business is promotionally led 
with distinctive and broad reaching 
advertising campaigns that focus on 
comfort, quality and value for money. 
DFS has a leading share with each 
customer segment that we identify, 
which means that on aggregate its 
customers have a national average 
income and are frequently families with 
young children.

DFS sells a wide range of fabric and 
leather sofas across a broad range of 
styles. Of particular note is the depth of 
choice of unit types in each product 
range it sells and the large number of 
colour and material choices. Products 

are complemented by an interest-free 
credit offer which is independently rated 
as market leading, British Standards 
kitemark accreditation, long-term 
guarantees and comprehensive 
after-sales service. 

Other than the clearance of discontinued 
showroom models and customer returns 
the DFS upholstery proposition is wholly 
“made-to-order”, with finished goods 
only being produced once a binding 
customer order is received. Products are 
made either in our five UK factories or 
through a limited number of 
manufacturer partners located in the UK, 
Italy, Eastern Europe and the Far East.

Showrooms typically range in size of 
retail space between 10 and 15,000 
sq.ft. and are located very commonly on 
major retail parks that are easy for 
customers to access. Because of its 
significant advertising spend, DFS is 
frequently an anchor tenant on these 
parks and attracts significant footfall in 
the sector as a destination retailer.

DFS Annual report & accounts 20183

Sofology % of  
Group revenue

14%

Sofology is the third largest retailer of sofas in the 
UK, despite having only a partial national footprint 
with its 41 stores. In contrast to DFS its marketing 
approach is not promotionally led, focusing instead 
on emphasising its product design, comfort and 
no-commission sales approach. While its brand has 
mass-market appeal, its customer base tends to be 
slightly more affluent then average and tends to have 
older children or be empty-nesters.

Like DFS, Sofology is a sofa and living room 
specialist with a broad range of upholstery products 
in fabric and leather and a range of living room 
accessories such as tables and rugs. Its range is 
differentiated from the market through emphasis of  
a number of design-led on-trend products, while  
also maintaining a broader range of attractive 
mass-market designs.

Sofology’s showrooms tend to be very modern in 
appearance and will typically have 12,500 – 20,000 
square feet of retail space across a ground floor  
and mezzanine. In addition to its stores Sofology 
operates six warehouses providing last mile two man 
delivery service.

Sofa Workshop is a premium retailer of 
exclusively British-made furniture, based 
in Godalming and operating 31 stores.  
Its customers tend to be high income 
families with older children who may have 
left home. The product range is distinct 
through exceptional quality and also 
through offering customers the option  
to bespoke much of the range in both 
dimensions and fabric coverings. Its 
products are made-to-order in a number 
of UK based partner workshops.

Dwell sells stylish, modern furniture, 
lighting and home accessories online 
and from 36 stores, mostly collocated 
alongside DFS showrooms. Its 
customers tend to be affluent and 
slightly older families in the 35-55 age 
range. In contrast to the rest of the 
Group, Dwell operates a stocked model 
allowing very short customer lead times.

Dwell and  
Sofa Workshop 
combined % of  
Group revenue

7%

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 20184

Chair’s statement

A weaker market presents 
challenges and opportunities

Ian Durant
Chair of the Board

2018 highlights

•  Acquisition of Sofology 

brings a significant addition 
to the Group

•  Tim Stacey to succeed Ian 
Filby as Chief Executive

•  Full year dividend held at 
11.2 pence per share

Overview
My first full year as Chair has seen two 
important developments for the Group.  
In November 2017 we acquired Sofology – 
a significant addition to the Group which 
extends our stable of furniture brands.  
More recently we have announced that  
Tim Stacey will succeed Ian Filby as Chief 
Executive later this year to lead the Group 
forward in the next stage of its 
development.

In last year’s report we noted that the 
trading environment for the Group had 
become markedly tougher, with weaker 
consumer confidence impacting sales 
particularly in the second half of last year. 
The start of this year saw some 
improvement in this picture and at the time 
of our half year results our expectations for 
the full year continued to be that the Group 
would deliver modest EBITDA profit growth. 
However, continued economic uncertainty 
for consumers, compounded by some 
exceptional hot weather over key trading 

periods in the final quarter, resulted in sales 
and profits for the full year falling below our 
expectations.

While retailers will inevitably feel the short 
term effects of external factors, we are 
focused on evolving our strategy to 
acknowledge the long term structural 
changes in our market and the changing 
expectations of our customers, including 
the role that online and, in particular, mobile 
technology plays in their interaction with us. 
The number of retailers entering CVAs or 
administration in recent months serves as a 
stark reminder of the dangers of failing to 
keep pace. 

Over the medium term, the current 
weakness in the market does present the 
Group with opportunities, which we can 
exploit through an unrelenting focus on 
understanding and satisfying the needs of 
our customers. It also requires a sharp 
focus on the returns from our capital 
expenditure.

DFS Annual report & accounts 20185

Full year dividend

11.2p

Looking forward
The Group continues to face a particularly 
uncertain UK consumer market in the run 
up to Brexit in March next year; the 
associated risks around this are discussed 
more fully in the Chief Executive’s review on 
page 22 and Risks on page 14.

The Board considers that the Group can 
look through short term market uncertainties 
and remain committed to the growth of the 
Group with some confidence. The executive 
team has begun the new financial year with 
great enthusiasm and recognises the 
opportunity to build upon the unique 
capabilities of the Group as the UK’s largest 
upholstery retailer (and manufacturer) under 
the leadership of Tim Stacey.

Ian Durant
Chair of the Board
3 October 2018

People
I am delighted that after an extensive and 
demanding process an internal candidate 
has been appointed as our new Chief 
Executive, and this illustrates how Ian Filby 
has built a team with growing strength and 
depth during his tenure. Ian has been an 
exemplary leader over the last eight years 
and his continued availability and support 
over the coming year will be invaluable  
as Tim Stacey develops the senior 
management structure which is now in 
place. Tim has already met with many 
external stakeholders as part of his 
induction to his new role and will present his 
assessment of our strategy to shareholders 
with the half year results early next year.

The colleagues in our shops, warehouses, 
offices, and delivery and service vehicles 
are dedicated, enthusiastic and proud of 
the Group’s market-leading position. We will 
continue to support their efforts by building 
on the extensive training which they receive 
and improving the information systems to 
allow the Group to become ever more agile 
and well informed.

Board
Following the departure of Gwyn Burr earlier 
in the year, I am pleased to welcome Alison 
Hutchinson to the Board. Alison has taken 
on the role of Remuneration Committee 
Chair from 1 October 2018. My thanks also 
go to Luke Mayhew for the admirable role 
he has played in the interim in leading the 
Committee through this year’s remuneration 
review.

Julie Southern has announced her decision 
not to stand for re-election at this year’s 
AGM and an active search is now underway 
for her successor as a non-executive and 
Chair of the Audit Committee.

During the year, the Board has maintained 
an active agenda with a particular focus on 
operational performance, strategy and risk. 
The Governance section of this report on 
page 42 provides further details of the 
activities of the Board and its committees.

Dividend
The Board has carefully considered the 
balance between regular dividends supported 
by the performance, expectations and capital 
needs of the Group and the return of capital 
where there is a surplus. We anticipate that 
value created over time will be delivered to 
shareholders through a combination of 
ordinary dividends, special returns and 
capital growth.

Notwithstanding the current subdued sales 
environment, our longer term expectations 
for the future earnings and cash needs of 
the business have enabled the Board to 
recommend maintaining a final dividend  
of 7.5 pence (FY17: 7.5 pence), taking the 
full year ordinary dividend to 11.2 pence 
(FY17: 11.2 pence). The Financial Review  
on pages 26 to 31 provides further 
information on our dividend policy.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 20186

Market overview

We are the clear leader in the 
living room furniture market

The living room furniture market is large and still fragmented despite ongoing market 
share gain and consolidation by leading players.

Market opportunity

Large potential customer base
The DFS Group has a specialist focus on 
the retail upholstered furniture segment 
within the living room furniture market.  
The UK living room furniture market was 
estimated by GlobalData to be valued at 
just less than £4.5 billion in 2017, of which 
around two thirds by value represents sales 
of upholstered furniture. We also offer a 
selected range of beds, dining and other 
furniture and home accessories giving 
access to other segments in the UK 
furniture market.

UK living room furniture  
market valued at

£4.5bn

Steady growth trends over  
long-term periods
Between 1995 and 2017, the UK upholstered 
furniture segment of the furniture market has 
grown by 2.3% per annum on a compound 
annual growth basis, driven by a c.7 year 
replacement cycle and underpinned by 
demographic trends.

We believe over shorter timeframes the 
segment is principally driven by three key 
factors: consumer confidence, housing 
market activity and consumer credit 
availability.

In addition to these market drivers we  
do see from time to time some material 
volatility in market demand levels caused  
by particularly hot or cold weather and 
significant public events.

Clear leader in the segment
The DFS Group, through its DFS, Sofology, 
Dwell and Sofa Workshop brands, is the 
clear leader in the living room furniture 
market with 22.5% share by value (as 
estimated by GlobalData for 2017). We see 
three broad categories of companies 
actively competing in the living room 
furniture retail market: Specialist Chains 
such as DFS, Sofology, ScS, Harveys, 
Furniture Village and Oak Furniture Land; 
Independents that are typically single store 
operations; and General Merchandisers 
such as Ikea, John Lewis, Next, Argos, 
Debenhams and all other retailers including 
DIY chains and supermarkets.

Living room furniture  
market share 2017

22.5%

Upholstery purchasers

A proportion of customers have always claimed 
they are ‘closed’ to the DFS brand i.e. they 
would not consider a purchase from a DFS retail 
store. Dwell, Sofology and Sofa Workshop allow 
us to target these groups of customers.

32%

would not consider  
purchasing from DFS

Upholstery market value

£3.3bn

68%

would consider  
purchasing from DFS

Through DFS we seek to offer a sofa 
for everyone, which means for the 
majority of consumers DFS is 
considered versus external 
competitors and also Sofology, 
Sofa Workshop and Dwell.

DFS Annual report & accounts 20187

In 2017 and 2018 the market has been in gentle decline, influenced by weaker 
consumer confidence following the UK’s referendum vote to leave the EU.

Key market drivers

Consumer confidence
Levels of consumer spending, particularly 
for big ticket items, are influenced by 
general consumer confidence. While levels 
of consumer confidence have been 
impacted by the outcome of the EU 
Referendum and the status of subsequent 
negotiations on the withdrawal process, as 
of August 2018, they remain in line with 
2017 and well above the lows seen in 2008.

Housing market
Independent research conducted on our 
behalf suggests that c.20% of upholstery 
purchases are triggered by a house move. 
Housing market transaction volumes are 
well above levels seen between 2008-2012 
albeit are trending lower than in 2017 and 
are still at levels significantly beneath the 
2006 peak.

Consumer credit
Upholstered furniture typically has relatively 
high unit prices and thus the availability of 
consumer credit can facilitate purchases 
and upselling. Consumer credit availability 
has improved since 2010 lows, and 
although the rate of growth over 2018 is 
lower than in recent years it continues to be 
significantly positive.

Consumer confidence1

Housing transactions p.a. (‘000s2)

Net unsecured lending growth3 (%)

Sep 2018

2017

2016 

2015

2014

2013

2008-12
2008-12

-7.0

-8.8

-3.3

2018 YTD 

2017 

2016 

3.1

2015 

-2.6

2014 

-18.6

2013 

-26.0
-26.0

2008-12 

-3.9%

Jul 2018 

1,224

2017 

1,230

2016 

1,226

2015 

1,223

2014 

1,067

2013 

893

2009-12 

8.5

10.0

10.1

7.7

5.9

3.6

-0.5

1.  GfK Consumer Confidence average of individual 

scores for each year

2.  HMRC – number of residential property transactions 
completions with a value over £40,000 for England 
and Wales, seasonally adjusted

3.  Bank of England – 12 month average growth rate of 

total (excluding the Student Loans Company) sterling 
net unsecured lending to individuals (in %) 
seasonally adjusted

Growing role of online
With furniture products largely either made-to-order or dispatched from a central stock-holding,  
physical retail space in the market has always primarily had a role as a showroom.

As web technology has improved, the 
web has however gained an increasingly 
important role in customers’ journeys with 
survey data now suggesting that over 
80% of UK customers conducted 
research online before placing an order. 
With online usage growing, technologies 
such as colour rendering, room planning 
apps and augmented reality are now 
helping customers visualise products in 
setting as a key element of their research 
journey.

Notwithstanding this, customers continue 
to find it difficult to judge true 
appearance, quality and comfort online. 
Most customers therefore want to take a 

“sit and feel” test in a showroom before 
committing to what may commonly  
be one of their largest household 
expenditures on a single item that year. 
Evidencing this trend is the growing 
tendency of online startup retailers to 
move to opening showrooms.

While in other product categories online 
retailers have seen some success by 
offering a “no quibbles” returns policy, the 
cost of reverse logistics in this category 
can be extreme. For a customer order of 
a sofa home delivery can typically cost 
between £50 and £100, making it a 
material operating cost for all retailers.

Given common fulfilment across retail 
channels and a make-to-order approach, 
retailers can be somewhat agnostic 
about whether a customer places a 
specific order online, by phone or in 
store, however we believe over 80% of 
transactions in the segment are still 
concluded in a store with customers 
typically seeking the reassurance of 
face-to-face advice, particularly on 
higher value purchases.

We believe this cross-channel customer 
behaviour will favour retailers with a strong 
omnichannel proposition, and particularly 
those that can deliver a consistent, 
well-invested proposition in each channel.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 2018 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
8

Our business model

Substantial scale and end-to-end 
control of the proposition brings 
competitive advantages

What we do

1

Design & inspire
We inspire consumers to consider a 
purchase through sustained advertising 
and inspirational website content.

We curate our ranges carefully, 
supported by a specialist in-house 
design team that drives our innovation.

Retail
Each brand has a national network of 
well-invested showrooms staffed by 
well-trained and highly motivated sales 
teams.

Our leading websites, apps and call 
centres serve to complement our 
physical presence.

Showrooms

232

UK based  
design studios

2

2

Customers: Unrivalled range, spanning 
styles, price points, in-house and Exclusive 
brands, supported with exceptional service 
and 15 year guarantees.

Creating value for stakeholders

Employees: Outstanding training, attractive 
pay and rewarding career paths.

Suppliers: Longstanding,  
mutually beneficial partnerships.

Group average post-purchase NPS

DFS employees over five years’ service

>80%

44%

DFS customer orders sourced from 
British factories

c.40%

DFS Annual report & accounts 20189

UK factories

5

4

Service
We back our products with a 
comprehensive installation service,  
a long-term structural guarantee and  
a team of over 200 upholsterers to  
address any after-sales issues.

We make our products more  
affordable through interest-free credit  
and demonstrate quality through  
established independent accreditations.

Manufacture
We are one of the largest manufacturers  
of upholstered furniture in the UK.

Our three finished goods and two 
sub-component factories each benefit  
from a highly experienced workforce.

3

Upholsterers

200+

Shareholders: Attractive growth and cash 
returns.

Community: Charitable contributions, 
employment and apprenticeship 
opportunities, and taxes.

Cash returns to shareholders since 
March 2015

>£90m

Raised for charitable causes in FY18

>£4m

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 201810

Our strategy for growth

Continued investment in 
stated growth levers

Our ambition

Using the strength of the DFS platform we will 
grow our retail brands to drive incremental profit 
before tax and continued strong cash generation.

1

Enhance our omnichannel 
proposition and maintain 
online leadership

dfs.co.uk is the clear market-leading online 
platform in our sector, accounting for over 40% 
of upholstery segment web traffic, and a 
proven track record of growing margin-
enhancing sales through this channel. Across 
the Group we now generate over £160m of 
online Gross Sales per year.

With most customers now beginning their 
research on potential furniture purchases 
online, our website provides both inspiration to 
visit our physical stores and the opportunity to 
make direct purchases through a convenient, 
interactive platform that is available 24 hours 
per day throughout the year.

2

Broaden our product and 
brand appeal

Building on our leadership across all segments 
of the upholstered furniture market we aim to 
increase our appeal to older and more affluent 
‘aspirational customers’ while retaining our 
core mass market appeal.

The DFS tradition of making all products to 
order, and our own UK manufacturing base, 
have provided a strong platform to achieve this 
by broadening the DFS product range, 
developing exclusive brand partnerships with 
leading brands such as French Connection, 
Joules Country Living and House Beautiful and 
acquiring complementary businesses.

2018 progress
•  Sales completed online continued to grow

strongly during FY18.

•  Integrating online technology into our stores 
through the roll-out of “Swoosh” furniture 
visualisation technology across the DFS 
estate and in-bay “i-Tabs” in Sofology 
demonstrates our ability to offer our 
customers a true omnichannel proposition.

Targets
• We will continue to maintain a share of over 
40% of upholstery segment web traffic.

• Our significant investment in key future 
online technologies, in particular mobile 
web, personalisation and strengthening the
omnichannel customer experience will 
continue.

2018 progress
•  We set a target to reach a share in the 

‘aspirational’ customer segment of 25% by 
the end of FY18, however we achieved this 
target a year ahead of schedule.

•  Building on this success, we launched a 
partnership to design, manufacture and 
retail an exclusive range of Joules branded 
upholstery and completed the acquisition 
of Sofology as a further Group brand.

•  We have now begun a new customer 

segmentation analysis to allow us to more 
accurately target valuable new segments 
with the right Group proposition.

Key performance indicator
Online growth rate

15.1%

(FY17: 11.1%)

Targets
• We will continue to grow sales of branded 

products ahead of DFS retail sales.

• We will not compromise our strong range 
and focus on our other core customer 
segments.

• We will invest in the growth of our non-DFS 

Group brands.

Key performance indicator
Growth in partnership brand sales

7%

(FY17: 20%)

DFS Annual report & accounts 201811

2018 progress
•  Three new larger format stores were 

successfully opened in FY18 at 
Haverfordwest, Rugby and Wednesbury, 
and we also opened two smaller stores in 
Chelmsford and Guildford.

•  We have identified and secured further 
locations for additional 10-15,000 sq ft 
stores that are each predicted to generate 
over £500,000 of incremental EBITDA net of 
existing store cannibalisation.

Targets
•  We will open between three and five UK and 
ROI stores each financial year using our large 
and medium 10,000-15,000 sq ft formats.

•  Each of these traditional formats is 

targeted to achieve cash payback within 
two years on the initial c. £1m operating 
and capital expenditure (including 
incremental logistics assets).

•  We will continue to test and learn from our 
trial small-format (2,000-5,000 sq ft) stores.

Key performance indicator
Number of DFS stores (UK & ROI)

116

(FY17: 113)

2018 progress
•  In FY18 we have completed our planned 

nineteen-strong UK Customer Distribution 
Centre (“CDC”) warehouse network, with 
the final two CDCs opening in early FY18.

•  £1 cost per order benefit in FY18 relative to 
FY13 and FY17 despite material inflation 
being absorbed over the long-term period.

•  We continue to convert the retail space 

released by the warehouse programme and 
expect to complete this repurposing in FY20.

Targets
•  Retail space released by our CDC openings 
will either be converted into new Dwell or 
Sofa Workshop stores, allow us to 
downsize our retail footprint, or be used to 
sell an extended range of furniture.

•  Once fully rolled out in FY20, our 
programme is targeted to deliver 
incremental annual EBITDA of an average 
of £650,000-£700,000 per CDC.

3

Exploit UK and ROI  
roll-out opportunities

We see continued potential to build on our 
nationwide store coverage by both opening 
three to five profitable new stores each year in 
the traditional 10-15,000 sq ft DFS store format 
and by developing smaller stores of as little as 
2,500 sq ft in high footfall urban locations.

We also see the opportunity to add new 
standalone Sofology and Sofa Workshop 
stores nationally to complete their network.

Our proven, bespoke customer catchment 
area model enables us to predict accurately 
where future store opening opportunities exist.

4

Retail space and  
distribution cost efficiency

Releasing former warehouse space in our store 
estate enables us to generate incremental retail 
sales while consolidating warehousing and 
delivery in lower cost and more logistically 
efficient offsite locations.

We are also looking across our estate for 
opportunities to make our existing retail space 
operate more cost efficiently, through 
downsizing.

5

Establish presence in 
international markets

Our ability to extend the DFS brand to new 
markets was first demonstrated by our 
successful expansion into the Republic of 
Ireland, where we opened our first store in 
2012, and is continuing with our more recent 
developments in the Netherlands and Spain.

2018 progress
•  To continue our development we 

conducted a national marketing test 
campaign in the Netherlands in early 2018, 
to understand the potential opportunity 
from further roll-out. 

•  This test was impacted adversely by the hot 
weather, so we will continue this test phase 
into FY19.

Key performance indicator
Stores with converted warehouse 
space

44

(FY17: 36)

Targets
•  Building on our success in the ROI, we aim 
to develop a profitable national network of 
10-20 stores in the Netherlands, which 
leverages our UK infrastructure and proven 
operating model.

•  We will continue development of our 

Spanish store presence to profitably serve 
significant ex-pat communities in southern 
Spain, giving us a foothold in the overall 
Spanish market.

Key performance indicator
Number of Netherlands & Spain 
stores

8

(FY17: 7)

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 201812

Risks and uncertainties

How we  
manage risk

The Group faces a number of risks and 
uncertainties in both the development and 
day-to-day operations of its business.

Identify
The Group has an established risk 
register which is coordinated and 
analysed by the Group’s Risk and 
Internal Audit function to facilitate 
regular review of key risks by the 
Directors. 

Each identified risk is allocated to a 
member of the Executive Board. The 
Directors maintain overall responsibility 
for risk management throughout the 
Group and oversee the implementation 
by the Executive Board and operational 
management of processes to manage 
these risks. The Audit Committee 
reviews the Group’s internal risk 
register on a regular basis.

Evaluate
The Directors confirm that they have 
made a robust assessment of the 
principal risks and uncertainties facing 
the Group, including those that would 
threaten its business model, future 
performance, solvency or liquidity.

Mitigate
These risks are discussed opposite, 
together with the Group’s related 
mitigating activities. Other risks which 
are currently either not known to the 
Group or are not considered material 
could also impact the Group’s reported 
performance or assets.

  See pages 53 to 55 for more on how 
risk is managed

Risk heat map

In analysing the key risks for our business, we consider regulatory and other external 
publications and peer group comparisons to ensure that the Group’s risk register is 
comprehensive and places appropriate emphasis on those risks that may pose a more 
significant threat. The heat map below illustrates the distribution of identified risks 
according to their relative likelihood of occurrence and potential severity of their impact 
after taking into account mitigating activities:

h
g
H

i

t
c
a
p
m

I

w
o
L

Low

4

3

1

6

7

8

2

5

11

10

9

Likelihood

High

Strategic risks
Impacting our business plans 
and development

Operational risks
Impacting our ability to execute 
& deliver our plans

Financial risks
Impacting our capacity to fund 
our activities

1  Economy & market

6  People 

10  Financial risk & liquidity

2  Customer proposition

7  Website & IT

11  Consumer finance 

3  Regulatory environment

8  Supply Chain

4  Brexit 

5  Acquisitions

9  Property & store network

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018Link to strategic priority

1

2

3

Broadening our product 
and brand appeal

Exploit UK and ROI 
roll-out opportunities

Establish presence in 
international markets

4

5

Full utilisation of 
store retail space

Maintain online 
leadership

Strategic risks

Risk

Economy and consumer 
market conditions
The retail market for upholstered furniture in 
the UK is highly competitive. The Group’s 
success is therefore dependent on its ability 
to compete effectively, particularly during 
peak trading periods.

The Group’s products represent a significant 
discretionary spend for customers and 
demand is heavily influenced by factors 
affecting the economies in which the Group 
operates including (but not limited to) 
consumer confidence, income levels, interest 
rates, the availability of credit and the level of 
housing market activity.

Customer proposition
Maintaining the reputation of, and value 
associated with, the Group’s brands and 
product offering is central to the success of 
the business. Increased customer concerns 
or poor customer service could have a 
negative effect on the reputation of our 
brands, leading to loss of revenue.

A failure to predict changes in customer 
tastes or the impact of changes in the 
competitor environment could reduce the 
Group’s revenues and market share.

13

Movement

p Increase

Unchanged

p Decrease

Strategic link Mitigation

Movement

1

2

3

4

5

1

The Group continues to make substantial investments in marketing 
to maintain its leading brand status. Marketing strategy is supported 
through econometric and customer insight analysis. The Chief 
Commercial & Marketing Officer is a member of the Executive 
Board.

Detailed sales information by product and store is reviewed daily, 
enabling changes to product selection, incentive structures and 
advertising strategy to be made on a dynamic basis to optimise 
sales. Critical KPIs are monitored on a weekly basis and 
appropriate actions taken.

The Group’s interest-free credit offer allows customers to spread 
the cost into affordable monthly payments.

Many of the Group’s operating costs are variable or discretionary, 
allowing the cost base to be effectively managed in periods of lower 
income.

Products and services are continually reviewed to ensure they suit 
customers’ needs, are competitively priced, offer good value and 
are supported by excellent customer service, in order to enhance 
the Group’s market-leading position. 

Our in-house design teams enable reaction to emerging trends and 
new entrants to the market. External design partners are also 
incentivised to generate new product concepts on a regular basis.

The Group’s focus on offering outstanding customer care and 
service is underpinned by our established use of Net Promoter 
Score (“NPS”) at all touch points of the consumer journey. 
Colleagues across the business are directly incentivised on NPS 
scores to reinforce customer-focused behaviours.

In-house customer service managers are available to expediently 
remedy customer product or service issues.

Quality Level Agreements are in place with upholstery suppliers, 
reinforced with internal quality control procedures to rapidly identify 
and rectify product liability and recall issues. Compliance with  
fire regulations and other quality standards is supported by 
independent external testing. DFS is the first and to date only sofa 
company whose products have been awarded the British 
Standards KitemarkTM.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 2018 
14

Risks and uncertainties
continued

Strategic risks continued

Risk

Strategic link Mitigation

Movement

Regulatory environment
The Group is subject to increasing levels of 
compliance requirements in many of its 
activities from regulatory and other 
authorities and is subject to regulatory risk 
with potential for significant financial impact 
or reputational damage.

Changes to the regulatory environment 
surrounding DFS product warranty insurance 
could impact the sales of these products. 
Changes in other legislation which may have 
significant retrospective or future economic 
effects could also impact operating results. 

Brexit
The Group sources a substantial proportion 
of its raw materials and finished goods from 
outside of the UK, has retail operations in  
the Republic of Ireland, the Netherlands and 
Spain and employs many EU nationals 
across its operations, both in the UK 
(primarily within its manufacturing operations) 
and overseas.

In common with other UK-based businesses, 
the Group is therefore exposed to a number 
of potential risks as a consequence of the UK 
leaving the European Union. These may 
include a negative effect on consumer 
demand, delays or additional costs in 
transporting goods into or out of the UK, an 
increase in the cost of goods and materials 
due to additional duties or tariffs, shortage of 
skilled employees and additional 
administrative costs.

Integration of acquired businesses
The Group has made a number of 
acquisitions in recent years, most 
significantly Sofology. The investment in 
these businesses was based on an 
expectation around the synergistic and other 
benefits that would be generated. Failure to 
effectively integrate these acquistions or to 
realise expected synergies could negatively 
impact the results of the Group.

1

2

3

4

5

1

2

3

1

2

4

5

Comprehensive training and monitoring programmes (including 
external audits and mystery shoppers) are in place to ensure that 
employees are appropriately skilled to deliver high levels of 
customer service and maintain regulatory compliance.

An executive Conduct and Compliance Committee is in place to 
monitor management information and review processes and 
procedures to ensure our customers are treated fairly. This includes 
rigorous oversight and escalation processes to maintain the status 
of limited permission to offer consumer finance granted by the FCA.

A comprehensive project, supported by external advisors, was 
undertaken to determine and implement the requirements of the 
General Data Protection Regulations and ensure the Group’s 
continuing compliance with data protection requirements. This is 
supported by ongoing review and monitoring.

The Group has established a working group to focus on the 
analysis of expected legislative and practical changes to the 
Group’s operating environment as a consequence of Brexit, and 
has engaged external advisors for additional guidance. 

The working group has identified a number of specific relevant 
areas of focus for the Group, as discussed in the Chief Executive’s 
report on page 22.

As further details become available of the UK’s changing 
relationship with the EU, this working group will continue to assess 
the specific impacts for the Group and develop the relevant 
mitigating actions.

The Group undertakes a thorough programme of due diligence 
before committing to an acquisition. This includes a rigorous 
analysis of the existing operations and capabilities of the acquired 
business as well as financial modelling of its potential future 
performance.

Experienced senior management, supported by appropriate 
external specialists, are engaged in the design and delivery of the 
integration plans and regular updates are given to the Board.

p

p

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018Operational risks

Risk

People
The success of the Group depends 
significantly on its ability to attract and retain 
a workforce that includes experienced sales, 
product design and production personnel 
and to retain members of its senior 
management team, many of whom have 
significant experience in the Group’s 
business and industry.

The physical nature of our products and 
handcrafted production processes involves a 
number of manual activities, increasing the 
complexity of health and safety compliance.

Website and IT systems
The Group’s websites are a key component 
of its omnichannel proposition and a failure 
to review and innovate in this competitive 
area could impact achievement of the 
Group’s strategic growth plans.

Effective operational systems supporting 
supply chain, customer delivery, call-handling 
and the processing of financial transactions 
are essential to the delivery of a good 
customer experience. Delays or errors could 
result in increased costs or lost revenue.

Websites and other parts of the Group’s 
operations depend upon the continued 
availability and integrity of its IT systems, 
including the security of customer and other 
data held by the Group.

Supply chain
A large portion of the Group’s products are 
supplied by a core of manufacturers, with 
many produced in continental Europe and 
Asia. The Group’s internal manufacturing 
operations also supply a significant 
proportion of goods sold and may not wholly 
be able to compensate for the failure of any 
of the Group’s key external suppliers to 
satisfy their delivery obligations. 

Increases in finished goods and underlying 
commodity prices may negatively impact the 
Group’s trading margins.

15

Strategic link Mitigation

Movement

1

2

3

4

5

5

1

Employee remuneration is structured to be at attractive levels and 
to incentivise employees towards results that are aligned with the 
objectives of the Group. In addition, senior management across the 
business may participate in equity in the Group or in longer term 
incentive plans operating over a three year cycle.

The Group seeks to promote a positive and inclusive culture. 
Working practices and policies are developed with the aim of 
improving the diversity of the Group’s people and making the Group 
an attractive employer for all.

A wide range of development and training opportunities are 
available for Group employees, supporting individual progression 
and retention of a skilled workforce.

Succession planning is operated throughout the business to identify 
short and long term successors to key roles. A high performance 
training programme is in place for individuals identified for key roles.

The Group continues to make significant investment in training 
employees in health and safety requirements. Dedicated internal teams 
are supported where needed by external advisers in specialist areas.

The Group continues to make substantial investment in both 
website development and digital marketing to maintain its market-
leading position. An established team of experienced staff in this 
field are supported with ongoing relationships with external 
partners.

The Group engages with independent third parties to actively 
monitor both customer satisfaction with its digital services and the 
emergence of new online competitors.

Operational IT systems are regularly reviewed and upgraded to 
ensure they continue to support the needs of the Group.

Full back up and business continuity procedures, comprising both 
internal and third party resources, are in place and are regularly 
reviewed, tested and updated. Technical security measures against 
data loss through a systems breach are in place and regularly 
reviewed and updated. 

Third party penetration testing is carried out routinely to check the 
resilience of the Group’s systems to cyber-attack. A colleague cyber 
awareness programme is also in place.

The Group maintains flexible supply arrangements to facilitate 
switching between suppliers where necessary and uses a variety of 
freight forwarders to avoid reliance on any one transport link.

Supplier performance is monitored against operational and quality 
targets and reviewed by senior management. All external upholstered 
furniture suppliers are frequently inspected by the Group to ensure 
working conditions and quality standards are maintained.

Fixed prices are negotiated for finished goods for each promotional 
cycle and the scale of the Group enables it to achieve significant cost 
savings with supplier partners. The Group’s in-house manufacturing 
capacity provides insight into production costs and the ability to 
create cost efficient designs.

The Group has established detailed plans to actively manage its 
cost base and supply chain to mitigate foreign currency exchange 
risks as far as possible. Foreign currency hedging is in place up to 
18 months ahead to provide stability of prices of overseas sourced 
raw materials and finished goods.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 201816

Risks and uncertainties
continued

Operational risks continued

Risk

Strategic link Mitigation

Movement

Property and retail store network
The growth of the Group depends in part on 
its ability to open and operate new stores on 
a timely and cost-effective basis while 
continuing to increase sales at existing 
stores. Successful execution of any new 
store roll-out also depends upon a number 
of other factors, including the hiring, training 
and retention of qualified personnel and the 
capability of the Group’s existing information 
technology and distribution systems to 
accommodate new stores.

Property leases represent a significant 
commitment of the Group’s resources. 
Unsuitable or underperforming sites may 
therefore negatively impact the Group’s 
results for a number of years.

Financial risks

Risk

Financial risk and liquidity
A downturn in the macroeconomic 
environment may impact the Group’s ability 
to obtain financing.

An increase in interest rates could increase 
the Group’s financing costs. The Group is 
also exposed to foreign currency exchange 
risk on certain purchases sourced from 
overseas.

Consumer finance
More than half of the Group’s sales are to 
customers who utilise its interest-free finance 
offerings, which are provided by external 
finance houses that, in return for a fee, 
manage customer repayments and bear the 
risk of customer default. Credit availability 
with respect to customer finance offerings 
typically tighten during periods of economic 
downturn, which may limit the Group’s ability 
to offer customer finance on commercially 
acceptable terms and/or may increase the 
amount of the fee payable to the external 
providers of customer finance. An increase in 
LIBOR may also result in an increase in the 
fees payable by the Group.

2

3

4

The Group continuously reviews the location and format of its 
stores and their contribution to overall results. A detailed appraisal 
model is applied to assess the payback period and expected 
profitability of each potential new store, including its impact on 
existing stores in the area. Appraisals are subject to thorough 
review and approval by the Board before any investment is made.

The Group has an established supporting infrastructure in place to 
recruit and train new employees and fit out and open stores to 
schedule.

The Group’s property portfolio is reviewed regularly to ensure it 
remains appropriate and cost-effective for the needs of the 
business.

Strategic link Mitigation

Movement

2

3

5

1

The Group regularly reviews its financing arrangements to ensure it 
has adequate funds in place and financing costs are kept to a 
minimum. In August 2017 the Group’s existing £200 million term 
loan was replaced with a new five year £230 million revolving credit 
facility. The new facility enables more dynamic management of 
short term borrowing needs, reducing interest costs.

Foreign exchange and interest rate risks are managed through the 
use of appropriate hedging arrangements in accordance with its 
Board-approved treasury policy, with details reviewed by the Board 
on a regular basis. No financial instruments are entered into for 
speculative purposes.

The Group has longstanding relationships with a number of finance 
houses, with long term contracts in place with four providers which 
more than cover the total requirement for customer finance. These 
arrangements provide surety of supply, acceptance rates and fee 
levels whilst also enabling a redistribution of business in the event of 
withdrawal by one or more providers. These key metrics are 
continuously reviewed to ensure that each provider remains 
competitive.

The Group’s Section 75 liability and complaints levels are extremely 
low due to its financial strength and focus on customer service, 
which is desirable to our finance partners.

An increase in LIBOR that affects the cost of providing credit may 
be mitigated by revising the customer offer in line with maintaining 
market leader status. Further information can be found in note 23 to 
the financial statements.

DFS Annual report & accounts 201817

Viability reporting
In accordance with the revised UK 
Corporate Governance Code, the Directors 
have assessed the prospects of the Group 
over a period significantly longer than 12 
months from the date of approval of the 
financial statements.

This assessment was based on the current 
position of the Group and the key risks and 
uncertainties as discussed on pages 12 to 
16 of this Annual Report and considered a 
period of four years from 28 July 2018. A 
period of four years was selected by the 
Directors since it reflects the period over 
which the Group’s various growth initiatives 
are anticipated to have a key impact on the 
business profile and corresponds to the 
Group’s normal planning cycle.

Those risks which could significantly affect 
the future viability of the Group were 
identified, including the risk of a fall in 
consumer confidence or other market 
decline and the challenges that may arise 
from the UK’s exit from the EU. The 
potential impacts of these risks on the 
financial performance and viability of the 
Group were assessed under a number of 
severe but plausible scenarios.

This assessment included sensitivity and 
stress-testing analysis of the impact of 
reduced revenues and a decrease in gross 
margin both separately and collectively. The 
analysis takes into account the high level of 
variable and discretionary spend in the 
Group’s business model and the existence 
and effectiveness of other mitigating actions 
the Group could take, including the 
restriction of dividend payments.

In developing the viability assessment it has 
been assumed that the Group’s £230.0 
million revolving credit facility will continue 
to be available at least until its maturity in 
August 2022.

Based upon this assessment, the Directors 
have confirmed that they have a reasonable 
expectation that the Group will be able to 
continue in operation and meet its liabilities 
as they fall due over the four year 
assessment period.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 201818

Chief Executive’s report

Continued development  
despite a challenging market 
in the fourth quarter

Ian Filby
Chief Executive Officer

In brief:

• Solid trading performance
until exceptionally hot
weather in fourth quarter

• Strategic levers continue to

be pursued

• Well positioned to become
stronger in this current
environment

Overview
Our financial results for the year reflect a solid 
trading performance over the first three 
quarters, and the impact of the sustained 
market slowdown we saw in the fourth 
quarter. This sudden change in market 
environment was caused by the combination 
of very hot weather and the distraction 
caused by major public events. This was 
compounded by the impact of container 
shipping delays at Felixstowe, one of our 
major ports, which delayed some previously 
anticipated customer deliveries beyond the 
financial year end and still continues to 
cause disruption. Notwithstanding this, over 
the first three quarters we were satisfied with 
our financial performance in a challenging 
market and were pleased to see positive 
like-for-like order intake in the third quarter of 
the financial year. Throughout the year we 
have also sought to continue our strategic 
development and achieved some significant 
milestones. 

Strategic update
Our Group has been transformed over the 
last twelve months through the acquisition of 
Sofology. We have commenced significant 
work to release the cost and revenue 
benefits of this new member of our Group.

DFS’s performance has long been 
underpinned by an efficient operating platform, 
which we are working to develop further. Our 
scale enables us to realise cost advantages 
across a range of activities, from buying and 
advertising through to warehousing and 
two-man customer delivery. Following 
investment in technology and infrastructure, 
DFS’s operating platform is now being 
leveraged in some areas by our subsidiaries 
Dwell and Sofa Workshop, and we have 
commenced work to broaden DFS’s 
integration with Sofology. Critically the 
operating management of each brand will 
retain direct control over all aspects of the 
customer experience, thereby ensuring a 
distinctive brand proposition is maintained.

DFS Annual report & accounts 201819

Our key strategic levers for the delivery  
of future growth continue to be those we 
set out at IPO. Progress in the year is  
described below:

Omnichannel
With the vast majority of sofa buyers 
carrying out significant research online, but 
also demanding a ‘sit and feel test’ in 
showrooms, we continue to believe a 
strong, integrated stores and web offer is 
critical to succeed in this segment. We have 
retained our strong online market 
leadership, with dfs.co.uk continuing to 
attract over 40% of all online specialist-
sector traffic, and unique website visitor 
numbers continuing to grow across the 
Group. Online revenues once again grew 
strongly by 15.1%, a pleasing result given 
the challenging market backdrop.

We continue to invest in and optimise our 
omnichannel experience, particularly the 
mobile site where most of our web traffic 
originates. Our Sofology business has made 
significant progress with its omnichannel 
technology with the successful launch of its 
‘my sofology’ app, which allows customers 
to receive additional information and build 
baskets on their phone in store, either 
independently or with sales colleague 
assistance, before then allowing them to 
check-out immediately or at home. On dfs.
co.uk, we are delighted to be the first UK 
furniture brand to launch augmented reality 
furniture display on iOS 12 through the 
mobile website.

Broadening our appeal to customers
While we are market leader with all customer 
segments that we identify we still see 
significant growth opportunity from 
broadening the Group’s appeal, with 32% of 
all potential customers that are aware of DFS 
still choosing not to consider the brand.

Our DFS advertising approach has 
continued to score strongly with customers, 
driving record ‘brand love’, ‘brand 
acceptability’ and ‘brand consideration’ 
scores. In making this progress we have 
also maintained 80% of all DFS advertising 
as having a pricing/promotional message, 
which has driven a strengthening of our 
perceived value and call to action.
We have continued to develop new ranges 
for DFS under the French Connection, 

Country Living and House Beautiful brands 
and successfully launched our new Joules 
ranges. We have also benefited from the 
sale of selected ranges from our own Sofa 
Workshop brand within the DFS store 
estate.

The acquisition of Sofology has also added 
a strong, distinctive brand with c.£180m of 
annual revenues to the Group’s portfolio. 
We see significant roll-out potential for 
Sofology with a large number of areas 
where DFS currently trades successfully 
remaining unserved by the Sofology store 
network. Leveraging the strength of the 
DFS Group operating platform will also 
create the potential for some £4 million of 
near-term synergy benefits in the 
purchasing of advertising, interest-free 
credit, upholstery and other services. In the 
medium to longer term there is scope for 
further cost and revenue synergies, and for 
better utilisation of both companies’ 
warehousing facilities and delivery fleets, 
together with potential for further Group 
benefits through shared innovation in the 
future.

Having now owned Sofology for 
approximately ten months, we are 
encouraged by the operational performance 
to date. Through the Group’s scale we 
remain on track to drive anticipated 
synergies, and our financial strength has 
allowed us to secure beneficial working 
capital terms. Assisted by our support, 
Sofology has been able to deploy 
significantly higher amounts of marketing, 
including the use of national TV advertising, 
which has driven material like-for-like 
growth year-on-year. While this trading 
momentum has been encouraging, from 
October 2018 we will begin to annualise the 
reintroduction of TV advertising. 

With the end of the earn-out period now 
being reached, Jason Tyldesley, Sofology’s 
CEO and former majority shareholder,  
has decided to leave the business. I am 
however delighted to welcome Sally Hopson, 
who has joined the Group to take on the 
Sofology CEO role. Sally brings tremendous 
experience to Sofology and the Group, with 
a proven record of success in the furniture 
business and wider retail, having previously 
held senior roles at Habitat, Asda and most 
recently Pets at Home.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 201820

Chief Executive’s report
continued

Delivering the highest standards of service to all 
our customers is explicit in our Group’s values.

Store network development
Our well-established programme of opening 
new 10-15,000 sq ft DFS stores in the UK 
and Republic of Ireland at the rate of three 
to five per annum has remained on track, 
with three new stores in Haverfordwest, 
Rugby and Wednesbury all opening in  
the first half of the year. We continue to 
develop our small format store operating 
model, with openings in Chelmsford and  
in Guildford during the year resulting in five 
in total.

We have three new DFS stores due to open 
in the 2019 financial year, maintaining our 
established rate of expansion. We intend to 
be more selective in future given the 
national roll-out opportunity in non-
cannibalistic locations offered by Sofology.

We are also currently finalising submissions 
for planning consent at an initial three trial 
retail park locations within the UK to 
optimise the existing leased Group retail 
footprint. In these proven locations, through 
the use of mezzanine space, we intend to 
open new Sofology and Dwell stores, while 
maintaining a full-size DFS ‘ground floor 
only’ presence, without any material 
increase to passing rents. We are also 
discussing commercial terms with a key 
partner landlord to deliver three further new 
build standalone Sofology stores within 
existing DFS leasehold curtilage, at a limited 
incremental rental cost for the Group. 

Retail space and distribution cost 
efficiency 
I’m pleased to confirm that our accelerated 
programme of establishing Customer 
Distribution Centres (“CDCs”) for final mile 
delivery to customers has now completed 
with the opening of our two final UK CDCs 
this year. At the year end 45 stores had 
benefited from the conversion of their former 
warehouse space to retail use, while the 
weighted average of converted stores 
operational through the year was 44. During 
the current financial year we are converting 
ex-warehouse space in 16 stores to sell an 
extended range of DFS beds and dining 
furniture, and we will open one additional 
Dwell store in Farnborough.

We opened six new co-located Dwell stores, 
thus reaching a total of 36 Dwell stores 
across the UK. We also opened five new 
co-located Sofa Workshop stores. Sofa 
Workshop further grew through the 
acquisition of six standalone stores that 
formerly traded as Multiyork. At the end of 
the financial year there were therefore 31 
Sofa Workshop stores operating, offering a 
true national footprint. We have been 
pleased at how quickly all these new stores 
have established themselves and we expect 
that Sofa Workshop and Dwell will generate 
attractive financial returns in the 2019 
financial year as they leverage the Group 
operating platform and benefit from their 
increased store network scale.

We have continued to make progress in 
negotiations with landlords regarding our 
leased property estate, seeing significant 
rent reductions in five recently extended 
leases. We also took the difficult decision to 
close, following conversations with 
landlords, two legacy DFS stores in 
Darlington and Wetherby and one Dwell 
store at Westfield White City. Although all 
established DFS stores contribute towards 
profits, we are highly disciplined in ensuring 
we generate incremental profits and good 
returns on the lease adjusted capital 
employed. We intend to maintain this 
approach in future and where we believe 
stores do not generate an appropriate 
return we will either mothball or close those 
locations. The annualised combined benefit 
of the actions recently implemented will be 
to reduce our rental cost by over £2.0 
million per annum, of which c. £1.2 million 
relates to leases renegotiated and 
extended.

Looking forward, with 42 leases now due to 
expire by the end of 2023, we continue to 
believe there will be a significant annualised 
property cost (rent and rates) benefit of 
£6-8 million to be realised through the 
renewal of leases.

DFS Annual report & accounts 201821

International development
Our measured strategy of testing and 
learning in the Netherlands continues to 
progress. As we previously announced, we 
trialled TV marketing this Spring to assess 
the potential uplift from replicating the UK 
operations’ broadcast marketing model. 
This proved initially encouraging, however 
as the Netherlands experienced the same 
hot weather seen across the UK in the 
fourth quarter we shall continue our trial for 
a further six months in order that we may 
fully assess this opportunity. This will fall 
within the scope of our budgeted operating 
loss in the Netherlands, which we expect to 
be in the range of £2-3 million for the 
coming year.

In Spain, our second store in Malaga is now 
fully established and together with our first 
store in San Javier, we continue to be 
pleased by progress. Notwithstanding the 
uncertainties surrounding Brexit, the 
business has performed well and 
contributed to operating profit during the 
year.

Customer service
Delivering the highest standards of service 
to all our customers is explicit in our Group’s 
values. Our approach relies both on 
proactive training and on careful monitoring 
of our Net Promoter Score (“NPS”) which is 
linked to staff incentivisation, combined with 
a feedback system that allows us to 
accurately measure and track the 
satisfaction of customers throughout their 
purchase down to product, store, factory 
and employee level.

I am pleased to report another strong 
performance in our DFS overall post-
purchase NPS of 84.9% during the year, 
broadly in line with 85.2% in the prior year, 
and an improvement in established 
customer satisfaction (surveyed six months 
after orders are placed) to 35.8%, 
compared with 34.2% in FY17.

The quality of our products has always 
been of great importance to use and we are 
very proud that DFS has become the first 
(and to date only) retailer in the sector to 
have its upholstery products carry the 
prestigious British Standards KitemarkTM.

Corporate responsibility
Our Group believes in responsible business 
conduct, and we work to raise our 
operational standards each year. We aim to 
interact with our customers, colleagues, 
shareholders, suppliers and the people in 
the communities in which we operate in a 
way that has a positive impact on society 
and the environment while supporting the 
Group’s longer term commercial and 
strategic objectives.

Our sofa recycling partnership with The 
British Heart Foundation generated close to 
£4 million this year and we are on target to 
raise £1.5 million for BBC Children in Need 
by 2019 through our “Give me Five” 
customer initiative. In addition we continue 
to support The Duke of Edinburgh’s Award 
and numerous local charities through direct 
donations.

We are committed to promoting a positive 
health and safety culture throughout DFS 
and improving the environmental 
performance of our operations year-on-
year. We have continued to invest in 
improving our processes and practices to 
ensure that we operate safe, secure and 
responsible workplaces no matter where 
they are.

We will introduce a timber sourcing policy in 
the current financial year, under which we 
will measure and report on the certification 
of timber sources to inform future 
improvements. We are also undertaking a 
review of our finished goods packaging to 
seek to minimise our impact on the 
environment.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 201822

Chief Executive’s report
continued

Impact of the UK’s exit process from the EU

We continue our work to assess and mitigate the likely impact from the 
current UK process to exit the EU. Given the range of possible scenarios it 
is impossible for us to be specific, however, we have been reviewing and 
continue to assess five potential aspects in particular, which may have an 
impact on our Group:

1.  Consumer demand – we recognise the retail market for furniture may 
be volatile, so we intend to remain vigilant to signs that consumer 
demand is being affected, so that we may seek to respond 
appropriately and expediently

2.  Border delays – while we have significant internal manufacturing 

activities and strong relationships with British manufacturers, just over 
half of finished good products that we sell are imported into the UK 
from mainland Europe or China. Although furniture goods will not 
‘spoil’ as a result of any border delays, we would still see a deferral in 
revenue recognition in our made-to-order model and there would be 
an adverse impact to the customer proposition. We are trialling ways to 
accelerate the movement of goods internationally to mitigate some of 
these impacts. We also import raw materials (principally timber and 
fabric) to manufacture finished goods. We would expect our partner 
suppliers to increase the near-shore supply of these.

3.  Increased regulatory burden and other friction – we operate our 

mainland EU activities using UK entities, and complying with European 
standards, including on passporting arrangements in financial 
services. We are reviewing any impacts on our ability to trade using 
this approach. 

4.  We do not currently expect to see a material tariff impact, as our finished 
goods currently largely attract a 0% tariff under WTO terms and our 
business has experience of operating within the tariff regime for Far East 
imports. Notwithstanding this there may be additional administrative and 
other cost burdens associated with the chain of custody requirements 
to avoid tariffs being imposed on raw materials imports.

5.  Exchange rates – the exit process may prompt movements in the USD/

GBP exchange rate, which would impact the cost of our Far East 
imports. We have increased Group hedging to cover our expected US 
Dollar requirements for the next eighteen months to give us increased 
time to respond to any such adverse trends.

We will continue our preparations for all likely process outcomes as part  
of our regular risk mitigation process, until the UK and EU’s path forward 
is clear.

We recognise investing in our team of more than 5,000 
people is critical to our success. We have continued our 
programme of training and development of all our people, 
with a particular emphasis on leadership development 
across our retail organisations. We are also proud of our 
award-winning apprenticeship programme, which is 
providing us with a new generation of highly-skilled 
colleagues. We are pleased to receive external recognition 
for excellence in employee conditions by the continuation 
for the fifth year of our Top Employer certification from the 
Top Employers Institute, and also our recognition within 
the Sunday Times’ Top 25 ‘Best Big Companies to Work 
For’.

CEO succession
DFS announced in May 2018 that I was planning to 
retire as CEO at the end of October 2018. I was 
delighted to see that the Board of Directors and 
Nomination Committee chose Tim Stacey, previously 
our Chief Operating Officer, to be my successor. 
Having worked with Tim for many years, I believe he is 
a strong choice with a good balance of omnichannel 
retail, people leadership, strategic development and 
financial analysis skills. This appointment reflects both 
the quality of the Group’s senior leadership and the 
success of our philosophy of developing internal talent. 
I look forward to supporting him in this role as I take on 
the role of Non-Executive Chair of Sofology over the 12 
months to October 2019.

Outlook
We have continued working to develop our Group’s 
strategic and market position; however financial results 
for the year reflected the exceptional downturn in 
market demand we saw in the fourth quarter. Our 
online channels, together with our Sofology, Dwell and 
Sofa Workshop businesses, continue to grow and we 
will continue to progress our operational and strategic 
development. The financial returns of strategic 
investments in online, new stores and our distribution 
network are feeding through into our results and we 
expect these along with operating cost efficiencies to 
benefit the new financial year.

We are pleased to note that the market has recovered 
since the start of the new financial year, with the Group 
seeing like-for-like order growth across all brands over 
the first nine weeks. We believe, however, we are 
benefiting from deferred purchases in the prior financial 
year and overall we expect the market to remain 
subdued into 2019, constrained by political risk and 
weak consumer sentiment. Notwithstanding this we 
believe we are well positioned to become stronger in 
this current environment, boosted by investment and 
acquisition benefits, and we have excellent prospects 
for profitable growth and attractive cash flow 
generation over the longer term.

Ian Filby
Chief Executive Officer
3 October 2018

DFS Annual report & accounts 201823

Chief Executive Officer Designate’s remarks

Introductory thoughts  
from Tim Stacey

Tim Stacey
Chief Executive Officer Designate

In brief:

•  I’m excited and honoured to 
take on this role and see 
many opportunities ahead

•  I have some strategic 

priorities where I intend to 
increase the Group’s pace 
and focus

•  I intend to present a full 

update on our strategy in 
early 2019

I am excited and feel hugely honoured to be 
very shortly taking on the position of CEO at 
DFS. I have enjoyed working with Ian and 
every single member of the DFS family over 
the last seven years to grow our market-
leading position and I see many exciting 
opportunities ahead. I’d like to take this 
opportunity to thank Ian for his continuing 
support and guidance, particularly over the 
last four months in helping me transition 
into my new role. 

To deliver the plan I need great people 
around me and I’m delighted to have such a 
strong Executive Team in place, consisting 
of talent from within the Group, following 
the restructuring of our key leadership 
positions to align with my appointment as 
CEO designate in August. I’ve also taken 
the opportunity to reinforce the executive 
team through the addition of Sally Hopson 
as CEO of Sofology. Sally brings a wealth of 
retail experience to the Group and will work 
with Ian Filby, in his new role as Chair of 
Sofology, to build this growing business.

In summary I’m looking forward to taking up 
the mantle of CEO and seizing the 
opportunities available to us to ensure the 
Group continues to flourish. 

There is a real ‘can do’ attitude that 
pervades throughout the organisation and 
this provides me with great confidence that 
we will build on our position as the market 
leader by delighting our customers, 
providing a great working environment for 
our colleagues and as a result produce 
strong returns for our shareholders.

During this period I have taken some 
significant time to pause and reflect on our 
strategic priorities. While I intend to present 
a more detailed update in our interim results 
in early 2019, I’d also like to share some 
early reflections at this stage. 

The five growth levers that we have followed 
to date have each had a clear business 
rationale and generated near-term returns. 
However, in today’s market, I intend to 
increase the pace and focus in a few 
specific areas:
•  We need to grow the core DFS business, 

driving like-for-like sales through 
strengthening of our end-to-end 
customer proposition and by 
accelerating our omnichannel strategy;
•  With the acquisition of Sofology, and the 
continued growth at Dwell and Sofa 
Workshop it is now time to develop a 
true platform of services shared across 
the Group to reduce costs and increase 
capital efficiency; and

•  We will exploit the revenue and earnings 
growth opportunities now presented by 
Sofology, Dwell and Sofa Workshop.

I’m also keen to ensure that our plans are 
underpinned by a deeper evidence-based 
understanding of our customers across the 
Group portfolio. We will continue our work 
in building these foundations. 

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 201824

Key performance indicators

Financial

Gross sales (£m)

£1,125.6m

Underlying EBITDA (£m)

£76.1m

+13.6%

FY18 

FY17 

FY16 

FY15 

-7.6%

1,125.6

990.8

980.4

913.1

FY18 

FY17 

FY16 

FY15 

76.1

82.4

94.4

89.2

Description
Gross sales represents the total amounts 
payable by external customers for goods 
supplied by the Group, including 
aftercare products (for which the Group 
acts as an agent), delivery charges and 
value added and other sales taxes.

Description
Underlying EBITDA means underlying 
earnings before interest, taxation, 
depreciation and amortisation.

Performance
Sales growth from new stores and 
Sofology acquisition, but decrease in  
like-for-like store sales.

Performance
EBITDA decrease from reduced Group 
sales volumes and the lower relative 
profitability of acquired business.

Free cash flow (£m)

£60.4m

Cash conversion (%)

79.4%

ROCE (%)

15.6%

+6.0%

FY18 

FY17 

FY16 

FY15 

+10.2%pt

60.4

57.0

75.6

70.7

FY18 

FY17 

FY16 

FY15 

-3.1%pt

79.4

69.2

80.1

79.2

FY18 

FY17 

FY16 

FY15 

15.6 

18.7

21.2

21.2

Description
Free cash flow is Underlying EBITDA, less 
cash capital expenditure and changes in 
working capital. 

Description
Cash conversion is free cash flow 
expressed as a percentage of Underlying 
EBITDA. 

Performance
FY18 growth in free cash flow reflects 
normalisation of capital expenditure levels 
as activity on retail space release 
programme completes.

Performance
Significant increase in cash conversion 
due to increase in free cash flow despite 
decrease in underlying EBITDA.

Description
Return on Capital Employed (“ROCE”) is 
post-tax operating profit before non-
underlying items plus operating lease 
charges expressed as a percentage of 
the sum of: property, plant & equipment, 
computer software, working capital and 
8x operating lease charges.

Performance
Decrease in ROCE reflects the lower 
profitability of the pre-acquisition Group 
together with dilutive impact of acquired 
business.

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018 
 
 
 
 
 
25

Non-financial

Number of DFS stores 

116

FY18 

FY17 

FY16 

FY15 

NPS (%) – post purchase  
customer satisfaction

84.9%

NPS (%) – established  
customer satisfaction

35.8%

116

113

109

105

FY18 

FY17 

FY16 

FY15 

84.9

85.2

83.9

78.8

FY18 

FY17 

FY16 

FY15 

35.8

34.2

31.2

21.9

Description
Number of UK and Republic of Ireland 
stores trading at the end of the financial 
period.

Description
Average across all DFS stores based on 
post purchase customer satisfaction 
surveys.

Description
Average across all DFS stores based on 
established customer satisfaction surveys 
(six months after order).

Performance
Net increase of 3 stores comprises 5 
opened and 2 closed.

Performance
Small year on year decrease in very 
strong overall level. 

Performance
Further progress achieved in FY18.

Online growth rate (%)

+15.1%

Growth in partnership  
brand sales (%)

+7.0%

FY18 

FY17 

FY16 

FY15 

15.1

11.1

15.6

17.5

FY18 

FY17 

FY16 

FY15 

Stores with converted  
warehouse space

44

7

20

33

94

FY18 

FY17 

FY16 

FY15 

44

36

19

8

Description
Year-on-year change in Group sales 
generated by internet, telephone and live 
chat channels.

Description
Year-on-year change in value of DFS 
sales orders of external partnership 
brand product ranges.

Description
Weighted average number of DFS stores 
during the financial period where former 
warehouse space has been converted 
into retail space.

Performance
Continued growth in omnichannel sales.

Performance
Year-on-year growth normalising as new 
partnerships annualise. FY18 growth 
includes introduction of Joules 
partnership.

Performance
CDC programme completed in FY18, 
remaining retail space conversion 
ongoing to FY20.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 201826

Financial review

Focus on maintaining gross 
margin and controlling costs 

Nicola Bancroft
Chief Financial Officer

In brief:

•  Reduced revenues in 
pre-acquisition Group 
impacted profitability

•  Sofology performance 

encouraging

•  Continued focus on 

maintaining gross margin 
and controlling costs

•  Targeted investment and 
cash management key to 
delivering shareholder 
returns

The Group successfully completed the acquisition of Sofology on 30 November 2017. 
Accordingly, the consolidated results presented in this annual report include eight months’ 
activity of the acquired business. In order to facilitate an understanding of underlying 
trading performance, the following table (which excludes non-underlying items) separates 
the results of Sofology from the pre-acquisition Group:

Gross sales

898.5

71.9

970.4

155.2

1,125.6

DFS
£m

Other  

brands
£m

Existing 
Group
£m

Sofology
£m

Total
£m

Revenue
Cost of sales

689.2
(276.7)

58.5
(25.9)

747.7
(302.6)

122.8
(61.0)

870.5
(363.6)

Gross profit
Selling and distribution costs  
(excluding property costs)

Brand contribution

412.5

32.6

445.1

61.8

506.9

(223.9)

188.6

(22.3)

(246.2)

(35.3)

(281.5)

10.3

198.9

26.5

225.4

Property costs
Underlying administrative expenses

Underlying EBITDA

(84.8)
(41.5)

72.6

(14.3)
(8.7)

3.5

(99.1)
(50.2)

76.1

DFS Annual report & accounts 201827

We began the year well prepared for the 
continued challenging conditions in the UK 
living room furniture market, and the actions 
initiated in FY17 to improve our gross margin 
percentage have yielded positive results.  
The underlying weakness in the market was 
compounded in the last quarter of the year  
by a sustained period of hot weather which 
impacted key trading periods.

The acquisition of Sofology represents a 
significant opportunity for the Group and 
the performance of the acquired business 
has been encouraging so far. 

As noted in the financial statements, with 
the expansion of the Group through a 
significant acquisition, we have taken the 
opportunity to enhance the presentation of 
our financial information by separating 
direct cost of sales from other selling and 
distribution costs on the face of the income 
statement. The table opposite further 
shows property costs separately in order to 
highlight brand contribution, our preferred 
measure of segment profitability.

Pre-acquisition Group
Gross sales and revenue
At the half year we reported a 3.5% 
decrease in Group gross sales and 
revenue, reflecting the tougher market 
conditions that had begun in the latter  
part of FY17. The impact of this new 
environment began to annualise in the 
second half of this year, giving a lower 
percentage decrease for the full year  
of 2.0%.

We had planned for challenging trading 
conditions through the year; however, as 
set out above, the final quarter was 
significantly more challenging than 
expected which gave rise to a disappointing 
end to the year as we described in our  
July trading statement.

As a consequence, gross sales for the year 
excluding acquisitions were £970.4 million 
(FY17: £990.8 million) and revenue was 
£747.7 million (FY17: £762.7 million).

Gross profit
While we experienced a reduction in 
revenue, we continued to benefit  
from our ongoing actions to improve our 
sourcing and range mix and consequently 
the gross profit for the pre-acquisition Group 
of £445.1 million (FY17: £448.5 million) was 
only 0.8% below last year. This represents 
an increase of 70 basis points in gross 
margin percentage to 59.5% (FY17: 58.8%) 
across the full financial year, in line with the 
expectation we shared at the half year.

This improvement was despite the impact 
of less favourable US Dollar exchange rates, 
particularly in the first half of the year. We 
continue to fully hedge our US Dollar 
purchases, with cover currently in place for 
the Group up to 18 months ahead. 

Operating Costs
The deflation in TV advertising costs that 
we noted at the half year continued for the 
majority of the second half, allowing us to 
make savings in promotional spend while 
maintaining our strong presence and share 
of voice. This deflationary trend annualised 
towards the end of the financial year and 
we anticipate some inflationary impacts as 
we move forward into FY19.

Other operating costs were broadly 
consistent as a proportion of revenue, 
reflecting the high degree of variability in our 
cost base. However, new store openings in 
the year (and annualisation of those opened 
last year) did contribute to a small increase 
in non-variable elements of employee and 
site costs. Total selling and distribution 
costs excluding property costs decreased 
by 0.5% to £246.2 million (FY17: £247.5 
million).

Property costs and  
administrative expenses
New store and CDC openings resulted  
in an increase in property costs of  
£4.3 million to £84.8 million, which in an 
environment of negative like-for-like 
revenues generated an increase in these 
costs relative to revenue.

Underlying administrative expenses 
increased by 8.9% to £41.5 million  
(FY17: £38.1 million) reflecting increased 
share based payment charges and 
auto-enrolment pension costs as well as 
some annualisation of vacancies filled in  
the last year. 

Underlying EBITDA 
As a net consequence of the decrease in 
revenue and other factors described above, 
underlying EBITDA for the pre-acquisition 
Group decreased by 11.9% to £72.6 million 
(FY17: £82.4 million).

Acquisitions
Sofology
The Group’s acquisition of Sofology  
Limited was formally completed on  
30 November 2017, with initial cash 
consideration payable of £26.0 million, 
reflecting a debt-free cash-free valuation of 
£25 million. After the recognition of an 
intangible asset of £13.8 million in respect 
of the Sofology brand name, goodwill 
arising on the transaction was £28.4 million. 
This figure represents an update on the 
provisional values available at the time of 
our interim results in March 2018.

The earnings period determining the value of 
any deferred consideration payable on the 
acquisition ended on 30 September 2018. 
Final results were still being prepared at the 
time of the publication of this annual report 
and there remains a high degree of 
uncertainty; however based on information 
available to date it is possible that some 
additional consideration may be payable and 
accordingly an accrual of £5.0 million has 
been recognised as a non-underlying 
expense.

The performance of the acquired business 
has been encouraging and we are 
beginning to see some early benefits of  
the synergies we aim to realise. Sofology 
contributed £122.8 million to Group revenue 
in the year and generated brand contribution 
of £26.5 million and a loss before tax of  
£1.4 million. If Sofology had been part of  
the Group for the full financial year, it would 
have contributed a total of £180.0 million to 
reported Group revenue, brand contribution 
of £36.6 million and a loss before tax of  
£4.1 million.

Multiyork
As announced on 22 December 2017, the 
Group agreed to acquire eight store leases 
and certain assets and intellectual property 
from Multiyork Furniture Limited on 27 
December 2017, following that business 
entering administration, for cash 
consideration of £1.2 million.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 201828

Financial review
continued

Combined Group
Revenue and profit
Total Group revenue for the year, including 
acquisitions, was £870.5 million, an 
increase of 14.1% on the previous year 
(FY17: £762.7 million). The relative increase 
in gross profit of 13.0% to £506.9 million 
(FY17: £448.5 million) was slightly lower due 
to the dilutive effect of the Sofology gross 
margin percentage which for FY18 was 
50.3% – substantially lower than the 59.9% 
equivalent margin reported for the DFS 
brand. While this dilution will not be 
eliminated immediately, the development of 
buying synergies and improved exchange 
rates on US Dollar purchases, offset by 
some inflationary pressures, should overall 
result in an improved Group gross margin 
percentage for FY19. The projected US 
Dollar requirements of the Group for the 
next 18 months are now fully hedged.

Underlying Group EBITDA of £76.1 million 
was 7.6% lower than the previous year 
(FY17: £82.4 million).

Group depreciation and amortisation 
charges increased to £28.3 million  
(FY17: £21.9 million). This was due to the 
combined effect of growth in the pre-
acquisition Group, reflecting the capital 
investment in the CDC and retail space 
optimisation programme over the last three 
years, and additional charges for Sofology 
fixed assets. Amortisation charges include 
£1.1 million in respect of acquired brand 
names.

The increase in depreciation and 
amortisation charges in addition to the 
reduced operating margin of the Group 
resulted in a 21.0% decrease in underlying 
operating profit to £47.8 million  
(FY17: £60.5 million).

Non-underlying costs
A total of £9.9 million of non-underlying 
costs are included in administrative 
expenses comprising £2.6 million of 
professional fees relating to the Sofology 
and Multiyork acquisitions, £5.0 million 
estimated additional consideration for 
Sofology, £2.0m of integration costs 
incurred to date to drive the release of 
synergies and £0.3 million of restructuring 
costs relating primarily to the closure of our 
national distribution centre.

As we have previously guided, there will  
be further non-underlying expenses of  
c.£3 million incurred in FY19 in connection 
with the integration of Sofology to unlock 
the near-term synergy benefits that we see 
for the Group. We anticipate that we will be 
in a position to achieve the estimated £4 
million annual benefit from these synergies 
from the beginning of FY20.

Operating profit after non-underlying costs 
was £37.9 million, a decrease of 37.4% on 
the previous year (FY17: £60.5 million).

Finance costs
At the start of the financial year the Group 
successfully refinanced its existing senior 
loan and revolving credit facilities with a 
new £230 million revolving credit facility. 
This has enabled us to flex the level of 
borrowings to more closely meet short term 
requirements, and minimise finance costs 
by using surplus cash to reduce borrowings 
instead of being held separately. The Group 
continues to manage interest rate risks 
associated with its borrowings through the 
use of appropriate hedging instruments.

As a consequence, notwithstanding the 
£21.3 million increase in net debt arising 
from the Sofology and Multiyork 
acquisitions, total net underlying finance 
costs of £10.7 million (FY17: £10.6 million) 
were in line with last year. In addition,  
£1.5 million of non-underlying finance  
costs were incurred in connection with  
the refinancing.

Tax
As in previous years, the underlying 
effective tax rate for the year of  
20.7% (FY17: 21.1%) was higher than the 
applicable UK Corporation Tax rate of 
19.0% (FY17: 19.67%), primarily due to 
disallowable depreciation on non-qualifying 
fixed assets. The higher total tax rate  
of 27.1% (FY17: 21.1%) reflects the non-
deductible acquisition consideration and 
expenses incurred in the year.

Earnings per share
Underlying basic earnings per share for  
the Group were 14.0 pence per share 
(FY17: 18.7 pence), a decrease of 25.1%  
on last year. Including the effect of non-
underlying operating and finance costs 
totalling £10.7 million, reported basic 
earnings per share decreased by 52.4%  
to 8.9 pence per share (FY17: 18.7 pence).

Capital expenditure
Although conversion of released retail 
space will continue through to FY20, the 
CDC warehouse opening programme  
was completed in the first half of FY18,  
and consequently cash capital  
expenditure reduced to £22.0 million  
(FY17: £28.3 million). This was slightly  
lower than our previous guidance of 
£24-26 million as during the year we began 
to source replacement commercial vehicles 
under finance lease arrangements. In FY19 
we anticipate cash capital expenditure for  
the Group, including Sofology, to be  
£24-26 million.

The Board continues to place importance 
on enhancing the Group’s return on capital 
employed. While we will continue to make 
an appropriate level of maintenance spend 
on our store estate and infrastructure and 
maintain a considered approach to our trial 
and innovation pipeline, we will focus the 
allocation of capital where there is a proven 
and positive return.

DFS Annual report & accounts 201829

Cash flow and balance sheet
Although the decrease in profit had an 
inevitable impact, the Group continues  
to be highly cash generative, with net  
cash inflow from operating activities of 
£67.5 million (FY17: £74.8 million). Free  
cash flow (measured as underlying EBITDA, 
less capital expenditure and working capital 
movements) increased 6.0% on FY17 to 
£60.4 million (FY17: 57.0 million), primarily  
as a consequence of lower capital 
expenditure.

Looking forward
As we move into a new financial year in 
what we anticipate to be continued 
challenging market conditions, we will retain 
our focus on maintaining our gross margin 
and controlling our costs while making 
appropriate investment in the growth of our 
business. The management of our cash will 
also be of importance in order to maintain 
the strength of our returns to shareholders 
and make the most efficient use of our 
borrowing facilities.

Nicola Bancroft
Chief Financial Officer
3 October 2018

After £23.7 million of dividends paid to 
shareholders, and the costs of acquisitions, 
closing net debt was £159.0 million  
(FY17: £144.5 million). This resulted in  
a gearing ratio of 2.1 times underlying 
EBITDA (FY17: 1.75 times). The Board 
continues to target a return to a gearing 
ratio of 1.5 times over the medium term.

The Group will adopt IFRS 16 in FY20 and 
this will have a significant impact on the 
reported gearing ratio of the Group as 
leasing obligations are recognised in full on 
the balance sheet. Our work in this area is 
continuing and we will provide further 
updates in the year ahead. This change in 
reported gearing will not affect covenants 
on our bank facilities which will continue to 
be calculated in accordance with the pre 
IFRS 16 methodology.

Dividend
The Board remains focused on delivering 
appropriate returns to shareholders whilst 
maintaining a robust balance sheet. Over 
the medium term the Board expects to 
target a dividend pay-out ratio of 45-50%  
of profit after tax and will continue to work 
towards its commitment to maintaining a 
capital structure of 1.5x net debt/EBITDA.

The Board has decided to recommend to 
shareholders a final dividend of 7.5 pence 
per share (FY17: 7.5 pence), resulting in a 
total dividend for the year of 11.2 pence,  
in line with FY17. This reflects the Board’s 
confidence in the underlying performance 
of and outlook for the business.

The Board continues to monitor the overall 
level of net debt in light of recent 
acquisitions and future investment 
opportunities. To the extent that the Group 
has sustainable levels of capital in excess of 
anticipated requirements, the Board 
expects to return it to shareholders.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 201830

Financial review
continued

Change of financial reporting period
As part of our work on transitioning Group reporting following the acquisition of Sofology we have completed a careful review of our 
Group’s operational cycle and fit with financial reporting periods. This review has concluded that moving the Group’s financial year 
to a 52 week period ending late June, would offer a number of benefits: 

1) Manufacturing operations benefits – In order to 
maximise deliveries in each respective financial period the 
business has historically sought to delay manufacturing 
summer maintenance shutdowns for both our internal 
operations and also supplier partners through to early August. 
This has not been consistently possible with external suppliers, 
and is seen as less desirable by our manufacturing employees. 
A June financial period end would consistently be before any 
shutdown periods, improving year-on-year comparability of our 
financial results as well as allowing manufacturers to choose 
their optimal timing for annual shutdowns.

2) Improved comparability of period ends – We see 
consistent strong customer demand to receive orders ahead  
of Christmas as part of our Guaranteed Christmas Delivery 
campaign, which contrasts with customers’ more variable 
willingness year-to-year to take delivery of orders at the end of 
January. We believe this consistent low point in the order bank 
allows more consistent measurement of trading performance in 
the half-year. Likewise we believe a similar comparability benefit 
will be seen in the change from July to June period ends, with 
the holiday period having differing degrees of impact on 
delivery of the order bank.

3) Timing of new store opening costs – Our experience 
indicates that the most immediate financial paybacks are 
generated by store openings made in time for the August bank 
holiday. In order to open a store in late August however, the 
store fit-out and training of staff must commence during July, 
resulting in a loss in that month as no revenues are being 
generated by the store. Although we have previously chosen to 
open a number of stores to be ready for the August bank 
holiday (most recently Barnstaple), it does create a distorting 
impact on the prior financial year. A move to a June financial 
year end allows these pre-opening costs to be recognised in 
the same financial period that the store opens.

4) Alignment of acquired business – Following its 
acquisition by the Group, there is a need for Sofology to align 
its financial year end (historically December) with that of the 
Group. This can be achieved more straightforwardly through an 
18 month long period of account to June 2019 than inserting 
an additional short accounting period in order to align to a July 
year end.

We will therefore adopt an accounting reference date for the Group of 30 June with immediate effect, meaning FY19 will be a 48 
week financial period ending 30 June 2019.

We do not anticipate there will be a material difference in our financial performance over the 52 weeks to June 2019 relative to the 
52 weeks to July 2019. To aid comparison however we publish below a summary of financial performance for the 52 weeks and 48 
weeks ending 30 June 2018.

DFS Annual report & accounts 201831

52 weeks ending 30 June 2018 (unaudited)

Gross sales

Revenue
Cost of sales

DFS
£m

Other  

brands
£m

Existing 
Group
£m

Sofology*
£m

Total
£m

902.0

71.4

973.4

132.1

1,105.5

691.3
(277.0)

58.1
(25.7)

749.4
(302.7)

104.6
(52.6)

854.0
(355.3)

Gross profit
Selling and distribution costs (excl. property costs)

Brand contribution

414.3
(222.5)

191.8

32.4
(22.0)

10.4

446.7
(244.5)

202.2

52.0
(31.0)

21.0

(13.0)
(7.2)

0.8

498.7
(275.5)

223.2

(97.7)
(48.8)

76.7

(84.7)
(41.6)

75.9

Property costs
Underlying administrative expenses

Underlying EBITDA

* Sofology shown for the seven months ending June 2018, since acquisition

48 weeks ending 30 June 2018 (unaudited)

Gross sales

Revenue
Cost of sales

DFS
£m

806.7

Other  

brands
£m

64.7

Existing 
Group
£m

871.4

Sofology*
£m

Total
£m

132.1

1,003.5

618.0
(249.6)

52.6
(23.3)

670.6
(272.9)

104.6
(52.6)

775.2
(325.5)

Gross profit
Selling and distribution costs (excl. property costs)

Brand contribution

368.4
(207.6)

160.8

29.3
(20.6)

397.7
(228.2)

8.7

169.5

Property costs
Underlying administrative expenses

Underlying EBITDA

* Sofology shown for the seven months ending June 2018, since acquisition

(78.1)
(39.4)

52.0

52.0
(31.0)

21.0

(13.0)
(7.2)

0.8

449.7
(259.2)

190.5

(91.1)
(46.6)

52.8

The strongly profitable financial results that can be implied for July 2018 and July 2017 partly reflects significant volumes of deliveries 
being made in the month, following the important Easter and May bank holiday periods. Lead times are also typically shorter in this 
period in order to minimise the customer impact of August manufacturing shutdowns and to ensure booked orders are recognised 
before year end. In addition, operating costs are generally lower during the July period as with limited consumer demand events, minimal 
promotional marketing spend is incurred. Measuring July and August together shows a financial result that is not materially different to a 
typical two month period in the year.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 201832

Corporate responsibility at a glance

At DFS, we believe in  
responsible business

Our approach

2018 highlights

At DFS, we believe responsible 
business should run through everything 
we do, so we can make a positive 
impact on our customers, employees, 
shareholders, suppliers, the 
communities in which we operate and 
our planet. Each member of our 
Executive Board takes responsibility for 
relevant matters within their area to 
align the achievement of the Group’s 
longer term commercial and strategic 
objectives with this ambition. 

This year we have continued to 
develop our people and products to 
give our customers the best possible 
experience.

Completed 
apprenticeships

34

 See page 34

The Board
Oversight of CSR matters and 
performance

Executive Board
Responsibility for focus areas

Areas of focus
People | Customers | Working Sustainably

Who benefits
Employees | Communities | Suppliers 
Customers | Shareholders

People & community

•  Placed 23rd in Sunday Times Best Big 

Companies to Work For 2018

•  Approved training provider under the 
Apprenticeship Levy, supporting our 
award-winning modern apprenticeship 
scheme

•  Almost £4 million raised for British Heart 

Foundation this year

Primary responsibility:
Chief People Officer

DFS Annual report & accounts 201833

Customers

•  DFS upholstered products the first to be 
awarded the British Standards KitemarkTM

•  Continuous customer feedback aligned to 

employee reward

Primary responsibility:
Chief Commercial and Marketing Officer

Working sustainably

•  Sustained control on CO2e emissions as 

we grow

•  Further progress on timber sustainability 

and documentation of sourcing

Primary responsibility:
Chief People Officer | Chief Commercial and 
Marketing Officer

Company  
car CO2

100g/km

 See page 37

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 201834

Corporate responsibility

People & community
The people in our business are absolutely 
fundamental to its success and the Group continues 
to invest in training and development to equip our 
teams with the knowledge and skills they need to 
provide the best possible service to our customers 
and to progress their own personal development.

New colleagues welcomed to the 
Group after Sofology acquisition

+1,000

We employ over 5,500 people across the 
UK, Republic of Ireland, the Netherlands 
and Spain. We believe that our ability to 
deliver fantastic products and service to  
our customers comes from the passion  
and commitment shown by all our people 
across all parts of our Group. We are proud 
of the work we do to develop and 
strengthen our teams.

Apprenticeships
We began our modern apprenticeship 
programme back in 2014 with a focus on 
recruiting and developing young people.  
We are very proud of our award-winning 
programme which supports participants to 
achieve formal qualifications in their chosen 
field, complete the Duke of Edinburgh Gold 
award and gain valuable work experience. 
To date, 34 young people have successfully 
completed the programme and now hold 
permanent positions in the Group in a 
variety of areas including service upholstery, 
manufacturing, retail and administration.

DFS participates actively in the national 
development of apprenticeship standards in 
manufacturing and retail for our industry. In 
February 2018 we were pleased to be 
accepted on to the register of approved 
training providers which means we are able 
to deliver Level 2 apprenticeship 
programmes ourselves utilising the 
Apprenticeship Levy fund. In addition,  
we actively promote the benefits of further 
learning and development for all our 
employees, at whatever stage of their 
career. As a result a number of existing 
employees are now pursuing advanced 
training at Level 3 and above and we aim to 
further expand this in the year ahead.

Workplace 

We first launched Workplace by 
Facebook as an internal communication 
and engagement tool in 2017, and 
currently more than 2,300 of our 
colleagues use it on a daily basis to 
connect teams and support business 
efficiencies. Our supply chain teams 
used Workplace to host their #Drivewise 
campaign to promote safe and efficient 
driving, posting regular updates and 
helpful advice. Our service manager 
teams have also embraced the tool, 
using it to host groups for different 
regions/areas and sharing best practice, 
while retail colleagues use it to facilitate 

queries and share successes. In addition 
to specific business area groups, 
company-wide groups generate positive 
engagement more broadly with activities 
such as the #HealthySelfie campaign in 
the ‘Living Well’ Workplace group which 
focused on colleague health and 
wellbeing.

We were delighted to receive recognition 
for the energy and enthusiasm our 
colleagues have shown in developing 
their use of the tool when we won ‘Most 
impressive business results’ at the 
Workplace awards.

Staff using 
Workplace daily

2,300

DFS Annual report & accounts 201835

Diversity

DFS firmly believes in the benefits of a 
diverse workforce. The gender analysis of 
employee numbers is reported to the 
operating board on a monthly basis and 
monitored against targets for sales and 
management teams. DFS has 
established a Diversity Steering Group to 
develop and implement new and ongoing 
initiatives to further improve our gender 
balance, including specific diversity 
objectives for all senior managers. The 
gender balance of employees at July 
2018 is shown opposite:

Directors

2018  

3 (50%)

2017

3 (50%)

Senior managers

2018  

10 (83%)

2017

6 (75%)

All employees

2018  

3,628 (65%)

2017

2,867 (66%)

Male 
Female

Although the proportion of female 
employees increased in each of the 
existing brands compared to 2017, the 
Group figures above also reflect the 
influence of the acquisition of Sofology. 
This has a particular impact on the senior 
manager category given the smaller 
number of individuals.

3 (50%)

3 (50%)

2 (17%)

2 (25%)

1,919 (35%)

1,473 (34%)

DFS aims to support the health and welfare 
of our employees and their families through a 
variety of initiatives including life and critical 
illness cover, and an employee assistance 
service. It is the policy of the Group to 
support the employment of disabled people, 
wherever possible, both in recruitment and 
by retention of employees who become 
disabled whilst in the employment of the 
Group as well as generally through training 
and career development.

During the year we have also increased  
our focus on the well-being of our people, 
with monthly ‘Living Well’ messages and 
activities to provide education and support 
on a wide range of topics including 
exercise, nutrition, stress management  
and mental health.

Employee rewards
DFS aims to reward our employees fairly. In 
addition to competitive salaries all 
employees are able to influence their 
earnings through reward schemes linked to 
performance. We also offer a Sharesave 
scheme to all UK and Republic of Ireland 
employees to give them the opportunity to 
share in the longer term success of the 
Group. During the year the Group published 
details of its Gender Pay Gap Reporting, 
further details of which can be found in the 
Remuneration Report on page 80.

Employee engagement
In addition to open communication via 
Workplace, employee views are sought an 
active programme of engagement surveys, 
the results of which are communicated back 
to staff. Having achieved 26th place in the 
Sunday Times Top Big Companies List last 
year, we were very pleased to have made 
further improvement this year, reaching 23rd 
place. We also continue to receive external 
recognition for excellence in employee 
conditions by the retention of our Top 
Employer certification from the Top 
Employers Institute.

Health & safety
The health and well-being of our 
employees, customers and partners is 
extremely important to DFS. We are 
committed to promoting a positive health 
and safety culture throughout the Group, 
and have continued to invest in training and 

in improving our processes and practices to 
ensure that we operate safe and secure 
workplaces no matter where they are.

All employees complete online training 
modules to ensure awareness of DFS 
‘house rules’ for health and safety and 
these are reinforced with monthly safety 
messages to refresh and remind on 
particular subjects. More detailed, role-
specific training is provided to store, 
production and supply chain managers. 
Other areas of the business receive focused 
training according to need.

Our dedicated health and safety team have 
made further enhancements to training and 
internal audit programmes to consolidate 
the significant progress made in this area 
over the last few years. Although we are 
pleased with the advances that we have 
made, we recognise that continuous 
monitoring and development is essential to 
sustain this. The Chief People Officer chairs 
monthly health and safety governance 
meetings with operational directors to 
review incidents and activities in detail and 
share experience and best practice. Full 
reports are provided to each Operating 
Board and Reputational Risk Committee 
meeting.

We were delighted to receive a Bronze Award 
from RoSPA during the year in recognition 
of our efforts and progress to date.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 201836

Corporate responsibility  
continued

Community 

The Group has continued to support the 
three major national charities with which 
we have longstanding relationships:

Our partnership with British Heart 
Foundation offers our customers a 
convenient and responsible way to 
recycle their old sofas while raising 
money to support the work of the charity. 
The scheme, which has been running 
since 2012, goes from strength to 
strength and has generated in that time 
an incredible £18 million for the charity.

We have also continued our support for 
BBC Children in Need through a variety 
of fundraising activities including our 
“Give me Five” initiative which offers 
customers a chance to win their entire 
order for free by entering a monthly draw. 
We have pledged to raise £1.5 million by 
2019 for the charity, which funds life 
changing projects for disadvantaged 
children across the UK.

DFS remains a Gold Partner of the Duke 
of Edinburgh’s Award, supporting young 
people to develop new skills for work and 
life and contribute to their communities. 
This includes our apprentices, who 
complete the Gold award as part of their 
apprenticeship programme. 

In addition to the major national charities 
above, DFS supports a number of 
charities and initiatives based locally to 
our operations across the UK and in 
Europe, particularly those promoting 
opportunities for young people. We also 
offer a matched funding plan for DFS 
team members raising money for a charity 
of their choice. Charitable donations made 
by the Group during the year amounted 
to £168,320 (2017: £181,050).

Customers
Our key strength as the market leader is to provide our 
customers with a fantastic range of products, backed up 
by friendly and knowledgeable customer service.

To ensure we deliver the highest levels  
of customer service we make significant 
investment in training and developing all  
of our people. Staff performance and 
customer satisfaction are monitored through 
regular inspections, surveys and mystery 
shoppers, which are carried out through an 
independent consumer research group.

Customer referral is the perfect indicator of 
excellent customer satisfaction and we use 
Net Promoter Score (“NPS”) as a measure 
of recommendation, which provides us with 
an internationally recognised predictor with 
proven links to business success. We 
measure this not only after a customer has 
placed an order (“Post Purchase NPS”), but 
also after their furniture is delivered “Post 
Delivery NPS”) and six months after the 
order was placed (“Established Customer 
NPS”). Established Customer NPS forms a 
component of remuneration for employees 
throughout the business, including 
salespeople, management and head office 
teams and Executive Directors.

All upholstered furniture items are 
offered with a guarantee of at least

15 years

The only sofa company  
awarded the British Standards 
Kitemark™ for quality

Amount pledged  
to BBC Children in 
Need for FY18/FY19

£1.5m

Products & suppliers
DFS goes to great lengths to ensure the 
quality and safety of all the products it sells. 
With nearly 50 years of designing and 
manufacturing sofas in the UK, our unique 
knowledge of the manufacturing process 
enables us to understand and work with 
our key suppliers worldwide to ensure they 
can meet our quality standards.

Our own detailed quality checks and 
product testing are supported by the use of 
independent safety specialists, and all 
upholstered furniture items are offered with 
a guarantee of at least 15 years. Fire safety 
is also of paramount importance so all our 
products are tested by independent 
organisations such as the Furniture Industry 
Research Association (“FIRA”) to ensure 
they meet our rigorous standards policy.

We are very proud that our upholstery 
products now carry the British Standards 
KitemarkTM for domestic furniture, making 
DFS the first and to date only furniture 
retailer to be awarded this prestigious 
external quality standard.

DFS Annual report & accounts 201837

Working sustainably

Environment
The Group has continued its efforts to 
improve the environmental performance of 
its operations. Our focus continues to be on 
the key areas of energy efficiency, waste 
reduction and reducing the impacts of our 
vehicles and transport operations. We have 
an Energy Management Policy in place to 
support the reduction of the Group’s energy 
use where practical and consistent with the 
operational needs of the business.

Electricity use is a key component of the 
Group’s CO2 emissions. Significant reductions 
in electricity useage have been achieved 
and we continue to roll out low energy 
lighting schemes. Additionally, we use 
automated meters to monitor and investigate 
usage of both gas and electricity.

Our customer distribution centres are all 
equipped with balers to facilitate the 
recycling of both cardboard and polythene 
used in packaging materials and we 
continue to look at ways to reduce our use 
of these materials. 

The growth in the Group has increased the 
number of customer deliveries being made. 
In addition to investing in telemetry systems 
for our distribution fleet, we also launched a 
#Drivewise initiative during the year which 
promotes techniques for safer and more 
fuel-efficient driving. All our drivers receive 
regular feedback via the telemetry system and 
use Workplace to share tips and knowledge.

We have also achieved further improvements 
in the CO2 performance of our company car 
fleet which at an average of 100g/km  
(FY17: 103g/km) is 18% below the UK 
national average for new registrations.

Greenhouse gas data

Scope 1 
Scope 2 

Total 

Tonnes CO2e
2018 

2017 

Tonnes CO2e per employee
2017 

2018 

14,229
15,608

13,766 
15,733

29,837

29,499

2.9
3.2

6.1

3.2 
3.7

6.9

Sustainability
DFS is committed to responsible sourcing, 
and our long-term aim is to ensure the 
timber and timber products in our furniture 
originate from well managed forests and 
recycled sources certified to credible 
certification standards, especially FSC®  
and PEFC certification. We are engaging 
actively with our suppliers to implement a 
robust verification programme for timber 
and timber products sourcing – to trace  
the timber and timber products used and 
bought to ensure legality and sustainability. 

We have longstanding relationships with 
our upholstery suppliers and close contact 
with them is maintained through frequent 
visits by our operational and senior 
management. DFS has led the industry in 
establishing quality level agreements with 
all suppliers; these set targets for ways of 
working and service outcomes together 
with a dedicated forum for working in 
partnership with suppliers to monitor and 
improve performance, including compliance 
with our ethical trading requirements.

Modern slavery
The Group does not tolerate modern 
slavery in any part of our operations or 
supply chain. We have developed a series 
of steps to mitigate the risks of slavery or 
human trafficking within our business, 
including: formal communication with  
new and established suppliers, regular 
visits to suppliers both in the UK and 
overseas to audit our suppliers’ practices in 
accordance with our supplier Code of 
Conduct. Our suppliers must be able to 
demonstrate that they operate to 
recognised standards, uphold human rights 
and prevent modern slavery. Our statement 
made in accordance with the Modern 
Slavery Act 2015, which contains further 
information, is available on our website at 
www.dfscorporate.co.uk.

As our businesss grows and our supply 
chain develops, we will continue to assess 
the effectiveness of our programme 
through our already established Conduct  
& Compliance Committee.

This Strategic Report was approved by the Board on 3 October 2018.

On behalf of the Board

Ian Filby  
Chief Executive Officer 

Nicola Bancroft
Chief Finance Officer

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 2018 
38

Board of Directors

N

—

—

N

R

A

Ian Durant (60)
Non-Executive Chair

Ian Filby (59)
Chief Executive Officer*

Nicola Bancroft (54)
Chief Financial Officer

Date of joining DFS
May 2017

Date of joining DFS
September 2010

Date of joining DFS
January 2013 

Experience
Ian has 37 years of retail 
experience, primarily at Alliance 
Boots, where his most recent 
roles were Retail Brand 
Development Director and Trading 
Director.

He was also previously Interim 
Chief Executive Officer of Nectar 
and Non-Executive Chair of Shoe 
Zone plc.

Qualifications
MA (Hons) in Chemistry from 
Cambridge University

External appointments
•  Chair of Joules Group plc
•  Member of the British Retail 

Consortium Board

•  Chair of the British Retail 
Consortium Policy Board 

•  Trustee of The Pennies 

Foundation charity
•  Director of IFF Life and 
Business Solutions Ltd

Experience
Nicola has 30 years of experience 
in the retail sector and previously 
worked for Alliance Boots where 
she held a series of senior finance 
roles, including Commercial 
Finance Director and Retail & 
Transformation Finance Director. 
She initially joined DFS as 
Commercial Finance Director and 
established the commercial 
finance function. Currently, as 
CFO, her responsibilities include 
finance, internal audit, risk 
management, financial services 
and company secretariat.

Qualifications
BA (Hons) in Accounting and 
Finance and fellow of the 
Chartered Institute of 
Management Accountants

External appointments
None 

Experience
Ian has a background in 
international finance and 
commercial management and 
previously held non-executive 
roles with Home Retail Group plc, 
Greene King plc, Westbury plc 
and, more latterly, as Chair of 
Capital and Counties Properties 
plc. Prior to this, he held several 
Finance Director/CFO roles at 
Liberty International plc, Sea 
Containers and Thistle Hotels plc 
as well as various associate 
companies of the Jardine 
Matheson group.

Qualifications
BA (Hons) in Development 
Studies, Economic and Social 
History from Kent University, 
Fellow of the Institute of Chartered 
Accountants in England and 
Wales and Fellow of the 
Association of Corporate 
Treasurers

External appointments
•  Chair of Greggs plc1
•  Trustee and Chair of Finance 
and Investment Committee of 
Richmond Parish Lands Charity 

Luke Mayhew (65)
Senior Independent  
Non-Executive Director

Date of joining DFS
October 2014

Experience
Luke previously served for 13 
years on the Board of John Lewis 
Partnership, including as 
Managing Director of the 
Department Store division. He 
also spent five years at British 
Airways plc and seven years at 
Thomas Cook Group plc in senior 
positions. He was also previously 
Chair of the British Retail 
Consortium, a Non-Executive 
Director of WH Smith plc and 
Brambles Ltd, and Chair of Pets 
at Home Group Limited.

Qualifications
BA (Hons) in Politics, Philosophy 
and Economics from Oxford 
University and a Masters in 
Economics from the University of 
London

External appointments
•  Independent Non-Executive 
Director of InterContinental 
Hotels Group plc

•  Trustee of BBC Children in 

Need

•  Trustee of the National Youth 
Orchestra of Great Britain 
•  Governor of the Southbank 

Centre

•  Director of Platinum Sports 

Management Ltd

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018Committee membership key
Audit Committee Member
A

N

R

Nomination Committee  
Member

Remuneration Committee  
Member

R

Denotes Chair

—

None

1  Chair of the Nomination  

Committee

2  Chair of the Remuneration 

Committee

3  Chair of the Audit Committee

* 

** 

to step down from the Board  
on 31 October 2018
to step down from the Board  
on 30 November 2018

***  to be appointed to the Board  
as Chief Executive Officer  
on 1 November 2018

39

N

R

A

N

R

A

—

Alison Hutchinson C.B.E. (51)
Independent  
Non-Executive Director

Julie Southern (58)
Independent  
Non-Executive Director**

Tim Stacey (47)
Chief Executive Officer  
Designate***

Date of joining DFS
May 2018

Date of joining DFS
February 2015

Date of joining DFS
July 2011

Experience
Tim currently serves as DFS’s 
Chief Operating Officer being 
responsible for retail, supply 
chain, IT, property and business 
development activities.

Prior to this, he was Business 
Development Director and led  
the successful acquisitions, 
integration and development  
of Sofa Workshop and dwell.

Before joining DFS, he spent 12 
years at Alliance Boots, where he 
became Multi-Channel Director 
responsible for Boots.com.

Qualifications
BA (Hons) in Accounting and 
Finance from Nottingham Trent 
University and member of the 
Institute of Chartered Accountants 
in England and Wales

External appointments
None

Experience
Alison has a background in both 
IT and retail financial services and 
was previously Group CEO of 
Kensington Group.

She has also held senior 
management positions, including 
Marketing Director, at Barclaycard 
having started her career at IBM 
where she became Global 
Director of Online Financial 
Services. 

Alison has worked with the retail 
industry over the last 10 years to 
establish the fastest growing 
fintech charity. Up to December 
2017, she was an Independent 
Non-Executive Director of Aviva 
Life, GI & Health UK. In 2016, 
Alison received a CBE for her 
services to the Economy  
and Charity.

Qualifications
BSc (Hons) in Technology and 
Business Studies from Strathclyde 
University

External appointments
•  Chief Executive of The Pennies 

Foundation charity

•  Independent Non-Executive 
Director of Liverpool Victoria 
Friendly Society Ltd2

•  Independent Non-Executive 
Director of Yorkshire Building 
Society

Experience
Julie was previously with Virgin 
Atlantic for 13 years, firstly as CFO 
for ten years before taking on the 
role of Chief Commercial Officer. 
Prior to joining Virgin Atlantic, she 
was Group Finance Director of 
Porsche Cars GB and Finance and 
Operations Director of WH Smith’s 
subsidiary HJ Chapman & Co. She 
was previously an Independent 
Non-Executive Director of Gate 
Group Holdings AG and 
Stagecoach Group plc.

Qualifications
MA (Hons) in Economics from 
Cambridge University and 
member of the Institute of 
Chartered Accountants in 
England and Wales

External appointments
•  Independent Non-Executive 

Director of NXP 
Semiconductors N.V.

•  Independent Non-Executive 

Director of Cineworld  
Group plc3

•  Independent Non-Executive 
Director of Rentokil Initial plc3
•  Independent Non-Executive 
Director of Ocado Group plc
•  Independent Non-Executive 

Director of easyJet plc

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 2018 
 
 
 
 
40

Directors’ report

Introduction
The Directors present their Annual Report and audited financial 
statements for the 52 weeks ended 28 July 2018, in accordance 
with section 415 of the Companies Act 2006. Certain disclosure 
requirements for inclusion in this report have been incorporated  
by way of cross reference to the Strategic report and the Directors’ 
remuneration report, and should be read in conjunction with  
this report.

The following also form part of this report:
•  greenhouse gas emissions, which can be found on page 37;
•  employees, which can be found on pages 34 to 35;
•  the Corporate Governance statement, set out on pages 42 to 

49; and

•  our strategy and objectives, set out on pages 10 to 11.

Information regarding the Company’s charitable donations can be 
found in the corporate responsibility report on page 36. No political 
donations were made in FY18 (FY17: £nil).

The Company
DFS Furniture plc (the “Company”) is a company incorporated and 
domiciled in the UK, with registration number 07236769.

The shares of the Company have been traded on the main market 
of the London Stock Exchange throughout the 52 weeks ended  
28 July 2018. The Company has no overseas subsidiaries but operates 
branches in the Republic of Ireland, Spain and the Netherlands.

Results and dividends
The Group’s results for the year are set out in the consolidated 
financial statements on pages 90 to 117. The Company only results 
of DFS Furniture plc are set out on pages 118 to 121. The Directors 
have declared an interim ordinary dividend of 3.7 pence per share 
which was paid on 20 June 2018, and also proposed a final 
dividend of 7.5 pence per share to be paid in respect of the 52 
weeks ended 28 July 2018. It is intended that the final dividend will 
be paid on 27 December 2018 to all shareholders on the register 
on 7 December 2018. The Company’s shares will trade ex-dividend 
from 6 December 2018.

Directors
The Directors of the Company who held office at the date of this 
Annual Report and their biographical details can be found on 
pages [38] to [39]. Following recommendations from the 
Nomination Committee, the Board considers that all Directors 
continue to be effective, committed to their roles and able to 
devote sufficient time to discharge their responsibilities.

All of the Directors were appointed to the Company on 2 February 
2015 with the exception of Nicola Bancroft who was appointed on 
1 August 2016, Ian Durant who was appointed on 2 May 2017  
and Alison Hutchinson who was appointed on 1 May 2018. In 
accordance with the Company’s Articles of Association, all of  
the Directors will retire from office and seek re-election at the 
Company’s Annual General Meeting on 30 November 2018, with 
the exception of Julie Southern and Ian Filby, who will step down 
on that date, and Alison Hutchinson who will seek election.

Directors’ interests
Information about the Directors’ interests in the Ordinary Shares of 
the Company on 28 July 2018, or date of appointment if later, and 
any subsequent changes as at 1 October 2018 is set out in the 
Directors’ remuneration report on pages 58 to 82.

Directors’ indemnities and insurance
In accordance with the Companies Act 2006 and the Company’s 
Articles, the Company has purchased and maintains directors’ and 
officers’ liability insurance cover which remains in place as at the 
date of this report. A review is carried out on an annual basis to 
ensure that the Board remains satisfied that an appropriate level of 
cover is in place.

Employees
As at the year end the Company employed 5,565 employees (as 
set out in the gender analysis table on page 35).

Articles of Association
The Articles of Association of the Company can only be amended 
by special resolution at a general meeting of the shareholders. No 
amendments are proposed at the 2018 AGM.

Annual General Meeting (‘AGM’)
The Company’s next AGM will take place on 30 November 2018 at 
DFS Head Office, 1 Rockingham Way, Redhouse Interchange, 
Adwick-le-Street, Doncaster, DN6 7NA at 2.30pm, and the Chair  
of each of the Board’s Committees will be present to answer 
questions put to them by shareholders. The Annual Report and 
Accounts and Notice of the AGM, including the resolutions to be 
proposed, will be sent to shareholders at least 21 clear days prior 
to the date of the meeting.

To encourage shareholders to participate in the AGM process, the 
Company proposes to offer electronic proxy voting through the 
CREST service and all resolutions will be proposed and voted on at 
the meeting on an individual basis by shareholders or their proxies. 
Voting results will be announced through the Regulatory News 
Service and made available on the Company’s corporate website.

Share capital
Details of the Company’s share capital are set out in note 21 to the 
consolidated financial statements. The Company has one class of 
Ordinary Shares and, as at 1 October 2018, the Company had an 
issued share capital of 213,030,601 Ordinary Shares of £1.50 each.

The rights and obligations attached to these shares are governed 
by UK law and the Company’s Articles of Association. Holders of 
Ordinary Shares of the Company are entitled to receive notice and 
to attend and speak at general meetings. On a show of hands, 
every shareholder present in person or by proxy (or duly authorised 
corporate representatives) shall have one vote and, on a poll, every 
member who is present in person or by proxy shall have one vote 
for every share held.

Other than the general provisions of the Articles of Association and 
prevailing legislation, there are no specific restrictions on the size of  
a holding or on the transfer of the Ordinary Shares. The Directors are 
not aware of any agreements between holders of the Company’s 
shares that may result in the restriction of the transfer of securities or 
on voting rights. No shareholder holds securities carrying any special 
rights or control over the Company’s share capital.

Authority to purchase own shares
At the last AGM of the Company on 1 December 2017, the 
Company was authorised to purchase a maximum of 10% of the 
Company’s issued share capital. This authority will expire at the 
close of the next AGM on 30 November 2018 unless revoked, 
varied or renewed prior to that meeting.

Since the date of the last Annual Report, no shares have been 
purchased by the Company and 161,120 treasury shares have  

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018 
41

been utilised to satisfy share-based employee-awards and SAYE options. As at the date of this Annual Report, 1,338,022 Ordinary 
shares of £1.50 each are held by the Company as treasury shares with the expectation that they will be utilised to satisfy future share-
based employee-award/SAYE option obligations.

A resolution will be proposed at the 2018 AGM to renew this authority.

Authority to allot shares
At the last AGM of the Company on 1 December 2017, the Company was granted a general authority by its shareholders to allot shares 
up to an aggregate nominal amount of £105,765,729 (or up to £211,531,459 in connection with an offer by way of a rights issue).

As at the date of this Annual Report, no shares have been issued under this authority. This authority will expire at the conclusion of the 
2018 AGM unless revoked, varied or renewed prior to that meeting.

A resolution will be proposed at the 2018 AGM to renew this authority.

Major interests in shares
As at 1 October 2018, being the last practicable date prior to the publication of this report, the Company had been advised of, and 
subsequently disclosed, the following significant notifiable interests in the Company’s voting rights:

Number of voting rights

% voting rights

Date of last notification

Franklin Templeton Fund Management Ltd

Jupiter Asset Management

Pelham Long/Short Small Cap Master Fund Ltd

UBS Investment Bank

J O Hambro Capital Management Ltd

Standard Life Aberdeen plc

Aviva plc & subsidiaries

SK Family Investment LLC

21,157,000

12,391,391

12,292,942

10,879,004

10,804,588

10,802,656

10,681,110

10,611,623

10.0%

5.9%

5.8%

5.1%

5.1%

5.1%

5.0%

5.0%

27 Aug 2018

23 Oct 2015

11 Apr 2016

21 May 2018

24 Nov 2017

9 Jul 2018

23 May 2018

28 Sep 2017

These interests may have changed since the Company received notification. However, notification is not required until the next applicable 
threshold is crossed.

Financial risk management
The Company’s objectives and policies on financial risk management, including information on credit, liquidity and market risks can be 
found in note 23 to the financial statements.

Going concern
The Group remains highly cash generative and currently has sufficient medium and long-term facilities in place, including a £230.0 million 
revolving credit facility in place until August 2022, of which £207.0 million is currently utilised at the date of this Annual Report. Further 
details of these facilities and the Group’s financial management objectives are detailed in the financial statements.

On the basis of their assessment of the Group’s financial position, forecasts and projections, the Company’s Directors have a reasonable 
expectation that the Company and the Group will be able to continue in operational existence as detailed in the Viability Statement on 
page 17. Thus they continue to adopt the going concern basis of accounting in preparing the annual financial statements.

Auditor and disclosure of information to auditor
Each of the Directors at the date of this report confirms that:
•  so far as he/she is aware, there is no relevant audit information of which the Company’s auditor is unaware; and
•  he/she has taken all the reasonable steps that he/she ought to have taken as a Director to make himself/herself aware of any relevant 

audit information and to establish that the Company’s auditor is aware of the information.

The confirmation is given and should be interpreted in accordance with the provisions of section 418 of the Companies Act 2006.

KPMG LLP has expressed its willingness to continue in office as auditor and a resolution to re-appoint it as the Company’s auditor will be 
proposed at the forthcoming AGM.

Subsequent events
Between 28 July 2018 and the date of signing this report there have been no reportable subsequent events.

This report has been approved by the Board of Directors and has been signed on its behalf by:

Elizabeth McDonald
Group Company Secretary
3 October 2018

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 2018 
Governance contents

Audit Committee report
•  Financial reporting
•  External audit
•  General Data Protection Regulations

 See page 50-55

Nomination Committee report
•  Chief Executive succession
•  New non-executive appointment

 See page 56-57

Director’s Remuneration report
•  Updated remuneration policy
•  FY18 bonus results
•  Proposals for FY19

 See page 58-82

42

Corporate governance statement

The effectiveness of our governance relies 
on a culture of open communication, 
mutual trust and honest assessment of  
our strengths and areas for development.

Ian Durant
Chair of the Board
3 October 2018

Dear Shareholder

I am pleased to introduce DFS Furniture plc’s corporate governance 
report for the year, being my first full year as the Non-Executive Chair.

We have continued to apply the principles and provisions of the  
UK Corporate Governance Code (“Governance Code”) and the 
following reports provide details of the Board’s activities during the 
year, including how it has discharged its governance duties and 
applied the principles of good corporate governance.

The effectiveness of our governance relies on a culture of open 
communication, mutual trust and honest assessment of our 
strengths and areas for development.

This year has involved an increased focus on succession 
management. This was particularly in relation to the planned 
stepping-down of Ian Filby, our Chief Executive Officer, further 
details of which can be found in the Nomination Committee report 
on page [56], and changes to the executive team which resulted 
from the appointment of Tim Stacey as his successor. It also 
included the appointment of Alison Hutchinson, to succeed  
Gwyn Burr, as a non-executive director.

In addition, the Remuneration Committee, following the third 
anniversary of our first Remuneration Policy as a listed company,
has reviewed the Directors’ Remuneration policy, in preparation for 
seeking shareholder approval at the forthcoming Annual General 
Meeting (“AGM”), in accordance with the requirements of the 
Governance Code. Further details of this policy can be found in the 
Remuneration Committee report on page 58.

In the Corporate Governance Statement last year, I noted our intention 
to undertake an externally facilitated review of the Board this year. I am 
pleased to confirm that such a review of the Board was carried out and 
the results of the evaluation were positive and helpful. This is discussed 
later in the Corporate Governance Statement on page 48.

Looking forward, the Board is considering the new requirements  
of the recently published 2018 UK Governance Code, (which  
takes effect from 1 January 2019) and ways to provide continual 
development and improvement of our governance. A particular 
area to highlight is the need to develop deeper engagement by the 
Non-Executive Directors with the workforce to better understand 
the views of our colleagues.

I look forward to welcoming shareholders to the AGM, to be held in 
Doncaster on 30 November 2018, and to receiving and answering 
your questions.

DFS Annual report & accounts 201843

Governance framework

DFS Furniture plc Board

Members:
Independent Non-Executive Chair
3 Independent Non-Executive Directors
2 Executive Directors

Audit Committee

Remuneration Committee

Nomination Committee

Members:
3 Independent  
Non-Executive Directors

Members:
3 Independent  
Non-Executive Directors

Members:
Independent  
Non-Executive Chair
3 Independent  
Non-Executive Directors

The Audit Committee’s role is to assist the 
Board with the discharge of its 
responsibilities in relation to financial 
reporting, internal controls, risk 
management, compliance and audit.

The Remuneration Committee recommends 
the Group’s policy on executive 
remuneration and determines the levels of 
remuneration for Executive Directors, the 
Chair of the Board and senior management.

The Nomination Committee assists the 
Board in reviewing the structure, size and 
composition of the Board and succession 
planning for senior management.

 See committee report page 50-55

 See committee report page 56-57

 See committee report page 58-82

Executive Board

Key governance activities

The main governance issues addressed by the Board, and its Committees, during the year include:

•  assessing the operating and financial 

performance and strategy of the Group, 
including the significant acquisition of Sofology, 
in the context of the trading environment and 
market expectations

•  planning and managing the selection process 

for the new Chief Executive Officer, to succeed 
Ian Filby on 1 November 2018, and a 
replacement Non-Executive Director

•  overseeing the continued development of the 
internal control and compliance environment 
in-line with the Group’s expanding brand 
portfolio, including the implementation of 
processes to comply with the new General Data 
Protection Regulation

•  reviewing and updating the Directors’ 

Remuneration Policy to ensure that rewards  
and performance are aligned whilst aiding the 
recruitment and motivation of high quality leaders

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 201844

Corporate governance statement  
continued

Compliance with the UK Corporate Governance Code 
2016: Introduction
The Board is wholly committed to upholding high standards of 
corporate governance and following a rigorous structure for the 
supervision, control and management of the Group.

The UK Corporate Governance Code (“Governance Code”), the 
latest version of which, that applies to this Annual Report, was 
published by the Financial Reporting Council in April 2016. A copy 
of the Governance Code can be found at www.frc.co.uk.

The Corporate Governance report that follows, which incorporates 
reports from the Audit and Nomination Committees on pages 50 to 
59 together with the Strategic Report on pages 1 to 37, the 
Directors’ Remuneration Report on pages 58 to 82 and the 
Directors’ Report on pages 40 and 41, describes and explains how 
the Company has applied the relevant provisions and principles of 
the Governance Code, and the Financial Conduct Authority’s 
Listing Rules and Disclosure and Transparency Rules throughout 
the year.

Compliance statement
The Company has adopted the “Governance Code” since 
admission of the Company’s shares to the main market of the 
London Stock Exchange on 11 March 2015. Throughout the year, 
the Company has applied all of the main principles of the Code  
and has been fully compliant with it.

The role of the Board
The Board currently consists of three Independent Non-Executive 
Directors, an Independent Non-Executive Chair and two Executive 
Directors. Biographies of all members of the Board appear on 
pages 38 to 39.

The Board is collectively responsible for the long-term success of 
the Company and for leading and controlling the Group and has 
overall authority for the management and conduct of the Group’s 
business, strategy and development. The Board is also responsible 
for ensuring the maintenance of a sound system of internal control 
and risk management (including financial, operational and 
compliance controls and for reviewing the overall effectiveness of 
systems in place) and for the approval of any changes to the 
capital, corporate and/or management structure of the Group.

The Chief Executive Officer (CEO) and Chief Financial Officer (CFO) 
are members of the Board and two levels of management sit below 
the Board: the Executive Board and the Operating Board, each of 
which are led by the CEO. The CEO and CFO therefore act as a 
bridge between Management and the Board. The Board delegates 
to the executive team the day-to-day running of the business within 
defined parameters and Board meetings are scheduled to coincide 
with key events in the corporate and trading calendar.

The Board has adopted a formal schedule of matters reserved for 
its approval and has delegated other specific responsibilities to its 
Committees. This schedule sets out key aspects of the affairs of 
the Company which the Board does not delegate, including:
•  approval of the annual Group budget and strategic four year 

business plan and review of performance against them, including 
approval of growth activities into new markets or countries;
•  approval of the interim/annual report and accounts and any 
preliminary announcement, including approval of dividend 
policy/payments;

•  approval of treasury policies, material guarantees, granting of 
security and entry into/material amendment of loan facilities;

•  approval and review of the management of balance sheet 

foreign exchange exposure;

•  approval of material finance and operating leases and approval 
of major investments including corporate/capital acquisitions/ 
disposals;

•  approval of changes to the Group’s capital structure including 

reductions of capital and share issues/buybacks;

•  approval of recommendations from the Audit, Remuneration or 

Nomination Committees;

•  ensuring satisfactory dialogue with shareholders based on a 

mutual understanding of objectives;

•  approval of changes to the structure, size and composition of 

the Board and any other control structure;

•  maintenance of a sound system of internal controls and risk 
management, including approval of the Group’s risk register; 
and

•  any decision likely to have a material impact on the Group from 
any financial, operational, strategic or reputational perspective.

All Directors have access to the advice and services of the 
Company Secretary, who has responsibility for ensuring 
compliance with the Board’s procedures. All the Directors have the 
right to have their opposition to, or concerns over, any Board 
decision noted in the minutes. During the year, no such opposition 
or concerns were noted. The Board has adopted guidelines by 
which Directors may take independent professional advice at the 
Company’s expense in the performance of their duties.

The Chair and the Non-Executive Directors met several times 
throughout the year without the Executives present.

Board committees
Subject to those matters reserved for its decision, the Board has 
delegated to its Audit, Nomination and Remuneration Committees 
certain authorities. There are written terms of reference for each  
of these Committees which are available on the Group’s corporate 
website, www.dfscorporate.co.uk. Separate reports for each 
Committee are included in this Annual Report from pages 50 to 82.

DFS Annual report & accounts 201845

Role of the Chair and Chief Executive Officer

The Board is chaired by Ian Durant. The Chair of the Company is responsible for leading the Board and ensuring its effectiveness in 
all aspects of its role. Ian Filby is the current Chief Executive Officer, to be succeeded by Tim Stacey from 1 November 2018, and is 
responsible for managing the profitable operation of the Company to create shareholder value by promoting the long-term success 
of the Company. The role is distinct and separate to that of the Chair and clear divisions of accountability and responsibility have 
been agreed by the Board and are set out in writing, as summarised below:

Role of the Chair

Role of the Chief Executive Officer

•  managing the business of the Board including organising 

•  managing the Group’s physical, financial and human 

and chairing regular meetings;

resources;

•  ensuring the submission to the Board by the Chief Executive 
of objectives, policies and strategies for the Group, including 
the Group business plan and annual budget;

•  keeping under review with the Board the general progress 
and long term development of the Group and ensuring that 
effective strategic planning for the Group is undertaken;
facilitating the contributions of Non-Executive Directors to 
the leadership of the Group;

• 

•  holding meetings with the Non-Executive Directors without 

the Executive Directors present, as appropriate;

•  ensuring effective communication between the Board and 

the Company’s shareholders;

•  acting on the results of the Board’s annual review of its and 
its Committees’ and individual Directors’ performances; and

•  appraising the performance of the Chief Executive Officer 
and making appropriate recommendations as to his or her 
remuneration to the Remuneration Committee.

•  planning the Group’s strategies effectively;
•  ensuring that the Group complies with all relevant 

legislation and regulatory requirements;

•  allocating duties and responsibilities to Directors;
•  reviewing the performance of the other Executive Directors 

and making appropriate recommendations as to their 
remuneration to the Remuneration Committee;
•  managing the Group’s relations with shareholders, 
customers, suppliers, regulators, other public 
organisations, other companies and the media; and
•  keeping the Chair and other Non-Executive Directors 

informed in respect of all relevant matters.

Role of the Senior Independent Director (SID)

The Governance Code recommends that the Board of Directors of a company with a premium listing on the official list of the 
London Stock Exchange (“Official List”) should appoint one of the Independent Non-Executive Directors to be the Senior 
Independent Director to provide a sounding board for the Chair and to serve as an intermediary for the other Directors when 
necessary. The Senior Independent Director should be available to shareholders if they have concerns which the normal channels 
through the Chair, Chief Executive Officer or other Executive Directors have failed to resolve, or for which such channels would be 
inappropriate. Luke Mayhew was appointed as the Senior Independent Director and has served in this capacity throughout the year.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 201846

Corporate governance statement  
continued

Board balance and independence
As mentioned in the Chair’s introduction, DFS has been fully compliant with the recommendations of the Governance Code in this area 
throughout the year.

Principal skills and experience

Retail

Customer 
service/ 
marketing

People

Operations

International

Regulatory

Finance

Ian Durant
Chair

Ian Filby
Chief Executive Officer

Nicola Bancroft
Chief Financial Officer

Luke Mayhew
Senior Independent Non-Executive Director

Julie Southern
Independent Non-Executive Director

Alison Hutchinson
Independent Non-Executive Director

Length of appointments
Non-Executive appointments to the Board are for an initial period of three years, are subject to annual re-election by shareholders at the 
Company’s Annual General Meeting and to any requirements of the Listing Rules, and are contingent on continued satisfactory performance.

Board length of service

Gender analysis

Executive/Non-Executive 
analysis

  0-3 years  33%

  3-6 years  50%

  6+ years  17%

  Male 

50%

  Female 

50%

  Executive 

33%

  Non-Executive  67%

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
47

Information, meetings and attendance
During the year, the Board met on eight occasions to review 
operational, trading and strategic performance, including the 
approval of the updated strategic four-year plan and budget for the 
next financial year. In addition, one scheduled telephone meeting 
was held to review the important Christmas trading period, and a 
further ad-hoc telephone meeting was held to review a market 
announcement regarding trading performance.

This year, a board meeting was held at the Customer Distribution 
Centres in Milton Keynes and it is intended to continue this initiative 
moving forward. The use of operating locations away from the 
Head Office or central London will help promote colleague 
engagement and provide the Board with greater insight and 
invaluable direct feedback.

A summary of meeting attendance for the year is as follows:

Meetings and attendance

Date of  
appointment

Board

Audit  
Committee

Remuneration  
Committee

Nomination  
Committee

Total meetings  
in financial year

10

3

Ian Durant

2 May 2017 10/10 –

Ian Filby

3 Feb 2015

10/10 –

Nicola Bancroft

1 Aug 2016

10/10 –

Luke Mayhew

3 Feb 2015

10/10 3/3

Julie Southern

3 Feb 2015

10/10 3/3

Gwyn Burr1

3 Feb 2015

5/6

Alison Hutchinson3 1 May 2018 4/4

2/2

1/1

5

–

–

–

5/5

5/5

3/3

2/2

6

6/6

–

–

6/6

6/6

5/5

1/1

Notes:
1.  Gwyn Burr stepped down from the Board on 30 April 2018 and therefore was only 

eligible to attend six Board meetings, two Audit Committee meetings, three 
Remuneration Committee meetings and five Nomination Committee meetings in 
the year.

2.  Gwyn Burr was unable to attend one telephone Board meeting (due to prior 

commitments) but received the papers, provided advance input and received a full 
detailed briefing shortly after.

3.  Alison Hutchinson was appointed to the Board and its Committees on 1 May 2018 
and therefore was only eligible to attend four Board meetings, one Audit Committee 
meeting, two Remuneration Committee meetings and one Nomination Committee 
meetings in the year.

All Directors are invited to attend the Audit Committee, the Chair  
of the Board is invited to attend the Remuneration Committee,  
and the Chief Executive Officer is invited to attend both the 
Remuneration and Nomination Committees (where appropriate). 
Members of the Executive Board are also invited to attend 
committee meetings as appropriate.

At each Board meeting, the Board receives and discusses reports 
from each of the Executive Directors. In addition, and as part of the 
process of maintaining an awareness of the Company’s activities and 
assessing the ability of the management team, members of the senior 
management team are invited to attend Board meetings to present 
papers to the Board. This process also affords senior managers 
the opportunity to bring matters to the attention of the Board.

The Board has a full programme of Board meetings planned for the 
year ahead and intends to meet eight times, with additional 
telephone meetings to review important trading periods, as 
appropriate.  

At these meetings, the Board will monitor the Company’s 
performance against the agreed strategy and business plan and 
review specific business areas, including Health and Safety and 
regulatory matters, in order to maintain and enhance a broad and 
thorough understanding of the business model.

The Chair, in conjunction with the Group Company Secretary, is 
responsible for ensuring that the Directors receive accurate, timely 
and clear information. Prior to each scheduled Board meeting, a 
pack is circulated in respect of the most recent financial period 
which includes an update on key performance targets, trading 
performance against budget and includes detailed financial and 
non-financial data and analysis. Board packs are distributed in the 
week prior to each meeting to provide sufficient time for Directors 
to review their papers in advance. If Directors are unable to attend 
a Board meeting for any reason, they nonetheless receive the 
relevant papers and are consulted prior to the meeting and their 
views are made known to the other Directors.

During the year, the Non-Executive Directors visited a number of 
UK retail, warehousing and manufacturing sites so that they are 
well-versed in the operations of the business and have a chance to 
meet with the front-line team members as well as centrally based 
executives. These visits, which are unchaperoned, provide the 
Non-Executive Directors with the knowledge necessary to facilitate 
strong debate and supportive challenge. 

Conflicts of interest
The duties to avoid potential conflicts and to disclose such 
situations for authorisation by the Board are the personal 
responsibility of each Director. All Directors are required to ensure 
that they keep these duties under review and to inform the Group 
Company Secretary on an ongoing basis of any change in their 
respective positions.

The Company’s conflict of interest procedures are reflected in its 
Articles of Association (“Articles”). In line with the Companies Act 
2006, the Articles allow the Directors to authorise conflicts and 
potential conflicts of interest, where appropriate. The decision  
to authorise a conflict can only be made by non-conflicted 
Directors. The Board considers conflicts or potential conflicts  
at each Board meeting.

The Articles require the Company to indemnify its officers, including 
officers of wholly-owned subsidiaries, against liabilities arising from 
the conduct of the Group’s business, to the extent permitted by law. 
For a number of years, the Group has purchased Directors’ and 
officers’ liability insurance and this is anticipated to continue.

Development
Following appointment, new Directors are subject to an in-depth 
tailored induction process. In the case of Non-Executive Directors, 
this includes meeting with key members of senior management, 
visiting operational locations, including showrooms, factories, 
support offices, Customer Distribution Centres and delivery and 
service functions, as well as professional advisors including 
brokers, lawyers and auditors. 

In addition, each Director receives key information and policies that 
are relevant to their position. For new Executive Directors, and 
Non-Executive Directors for whom the appointment is their first to 
a UK-listed company, the induction includes details of the legal 
duties and obligations of being a Director of the Company. In the 
case of the new CEO designate, this included a shadowing of the 
current CEO at relevant external and internal meetings.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 201848

Corporate governance statement  
continued

Board evaluation
The Board carried out its third review of its own effectiveness, and 
that of its various Committees, during the year. For the first time, 
this review was externally facilitated by NJMD Corporate Services 
Limited, who have no connection with the Company or individual 
directors. The process involved each Director, the Group Company 
Secretary and each Executive Board member completing a formal 
questionnaire and attending a follow-up one-to-one interview on 
the performance of the Board and each of the Board committees, 
considering the balance of skills, diversity, independence and 
knowledge of the Company on the Board, how the Board works 
together, and other factors relevant to its effectiveness. This 
external review included attendance at, and observation of, one 
Board meeting.

The consensus was that the Board, and its Committees, had 
performed effectively and had addressed many of the areas 
previously identified as requiring further attention. Nevertheless, the 
Board recognised areas for ongoing development which should 
form the focus for the Board, and its Chair, in the following year.

The Governance Code, including the recently published 2018 
version, provides that evaluation of the Board of FTSE 350 
companies should be externally facilitated at least every three 
years. Therefore, in line with this best practice, it is intended that 
the next such externally-facilitated review will take place during 
2021 at the latest.

The Non-Executive Directors’ appointment letters anticipate a 
minimum time commitment of two days per month, recognising 
that there is always the possibility of an additional time 
commitment and ad hoc matters arising from time to time, 
particularly when the Company is undergoing a period of increased 
activity. The average time commitment inevitably increases where 
a Non-Executive Director assumes additional responsibilities such 
as being appointed to a Board Committee.

Relations with shareholders
The Board recognises its responsibility for overseeing a 
satisfactory dialogue with shareholders takes place which includes 
regular briefings by the executive team in association with trading 
updates and biannual results announcements. In May 2018,  
a capital markets presentation featuring the wider executive team 
was held at the Croydon showrooms, of DFS, Dwell and Sofology, 
and was well attended by analysts and investors.

In addition to the extensive engagement carried out by the CEO, 
CFO and Director of Corporate Finance, the Chairman, SID and 
Chair of the Remuneration Committees met or spoke to a number 
of shareholders during the year. The Chair makes himself available 
to shareholders so that any major issues and concerns are 
communicated to the Board through the Chair.

In particular, the Company communicates with both the 
institutional and private shareholders through the following means:

The Senior Independent Director, Luke Mayhew, together with the 
Independent Non-Executive Directors, evaluated the performance 
of the Chair and discussed the results with him.

Election of Directors
The Board can appoint any person to be a Director, either to fill a 
vacancy or as an addition to the existing Board. Any Director so 
appointed by the Board shall hold office only until the next 
following AGM and shall then be eligible for election by 
shareholders. In accordance with the Articles, Alison Hutchinson 
and Tim Stacey will be offering themselves for election at the 
forthcoming AGM, along with all the other Directors for re-election, 
with the exception of Ian Filby and Julie Southern who have 
announced their intention to step-down. The AGM is to be held at 
DFS Head Office, 1 Rockingham Way, Redhouse Interchange, 
Adwick-le-Street, Doncaster, DN6 7NA, on 30 November 2018, full 
details of which are set out in the notice of meeting accompanying 
this Annual Report.

As noted above, following the formal internal evaluation process of 
the effectiveness of the Board, the Board is satisfied that each 
Director remains competent to discharge his/her responsibilities as 
a member of the Board.

External appointments
The Executive Directors may accept outside appointments 
provided that such appointments do not in any way prejudice their 
ability to perform their duties as Executive Directors of the 
Company. Ian Filby continues to be a director of IFF Life and 
Business Solutions Limited, a trustee of The Pennies Foundation 
charity, a member of the British Retail Consortium Board and, from 
1 August 2018, the Chair of Joules Group plc. The Board considers 
that these appointments do not adversely impact his ability to carry 
out his role. Nicola Bancroft and Tim Stacey, do not currently hold 
any outside appointments.

Interaction with all shareholders
•  the Company’s corporate website (www.dfscorporate.co.
uk), where investor information and news is regularly 
updated.

•  the Annual Report, which sets out details of the Company’s 
strategy, business model and performance over the past 
financial year and plans for future growth.

•  the Annual General Meeting, where all shareholders have 

the opportunity to vote on the resolutions proposed and to 
put questions to the Board and executive team.

•  presentations of full-year and interim results to analysts and 
shareholders, which are also available on the Company’s 
corporate website.

Interaction with institutional shareholders
•  the Chief Executive Officer, Chief Financial Officer and 
Director of Corporate Finance hold meetings with 
institutional investors following the full-year and interim 
results.

•  the Chair meets with institutional shareholders where 

appropriate.

Interaction with private shareholders
•  dial-in facility to live presentations of the full-year and 

interim results.

•  dedicated email point of contact to answer shareholder 

questions and queries.

DFS Annual report & accounts 201849

Investor relations activity, analysis of the share register, comments 
by analysts, views of major shareholders and advice from the 
Company’s brokers are all ongoing items of review by the Board in 
order to maintain an understanding of market perceptions.

In particular, the potential effects of MiFID II on market awareness 
of our investment proposition are closely monitored by the Director 
of Corporate Finance so that any adverse trends can be identified 
and reported to the Board in a timely manner. Although no material 
effect has been experienced to date, this issue remains under 
review to enable the approach to investor relations to be tailored as 
appropriate.

Relations with other stakeholders
The Group considers our customers, colleagues, suppliers, the 
environment and community as our principal stakeholders in 
addition to our shareholders. The Corporate Responsibility report 
on pages 32 to 37 sets out more detail on how we manage our 
relationships with them. The Board’s engagement with each of 
these is set out below:

Customers
•  monthly customer KPIs included in the Board packs, including 

Net Promoter scores

•  all Directors visit stores regularly
•  customer insight research presented to the Board

Colleagues 
•  Chief People Officer updates the Board twice a year on Health 

and Safety matters and the results of our colleague 
engagement survey

•  monthly colleague KPIs included in the Board packs, including 

average earnings and staff turnover

•  annual conference for senior head office, retail, supply chain, 

operations and manufacturing colleagues, attended by all Board 
members where possible

•  all Directors visit operational locations regularly accompanied by 
a member of the Executive Board or senior management team

Suppliers 
•  selected key suppliers attend the annual conference (noted 

above)

•  Chief Executive Officer and relevant Executive Board members 

meet regularly with key suppliers

Environment/community
•  charity fundraising activities attended by all Board members 

where possible

•  all Directors visit operational locations regularly

The Non-Executive Directors are available to discuss any matter 
stakeholders might wish to raise. The Chair and Non-Executive 
Directors are also available to attend investor relations meetings or 
to request meetings with investors or analysts independently of the 
Group’s management, if required.

DTR Disclosure
The disclosures required under DTR 7.2 of the Disclosure and 
Transparency Rules are contained in this report, and the Audit 
Committee and Nomination Committee Reports, except for 
information required under DTR 7.2.6 which is contained in the 
Directors’ Report on pages 40 and 41.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 201850

Audit Committee report

The integration of all subsidiary trading companies 
into the Group’s internal control environment, 
particularly with the recent acquisition of Sofology, 
has been an area of focus.

Julie Southern
Chair of the  
Audit Committee
3 October 2018

2018 highlights

•  reviewing the integrity of the Group’s  

financial reporting

•  reviewing Group risk management  

and reporting

•  overseeing the implementation of the  
General Data Protection Regulations

I am pleased to present this year’s Audit Committee report.

The Committee plays an important role in the governance of the 
Company and this report sets out details of the work undertaken 
by the Committee during the year. The Committee’s main activities 
focused on the integrity of financial reporting, the quality, scope 
and effectiveness of both the internal audit function and the 
external audit, ensuring appropriate systems of internal control  
and reviewing all aspects of risk facing the Group.

This year, the integration of all subsidiary trading companies into 
the Group’s internal control environment, particularly with the 
recent acquisition of Sofology, has been an area of focus which will 
continue to feature prominently within future internal audit plans.

In addition, the Committee has overseen the implementation of the 
General Data Protection Regulation and I am pleased with the high 
level of engagement shown by our colleagues throughout the 
Group. Furthermore, I am encouraged by the work undertaken to 
date in relation to the implementation of the changes to lease 
accounting which is likely to have a significant impact on the 
Group’s financial statements.

As part of the externally facilitated annual Board evaluation this 
year, the performance of the Audit Committee was reviewed and  
I am happy to report that there were no areas of concern and the 
results of the evaluation showed that the Committee was operating 
effectively.

Lastly, as previously announced, I have confirmed my intention  
to step-down as a Non-Executive Director and Chair of the Audit 
Committee at the forthcoming AGM in November 2018. I would like 
to thank the Company and my fellow Committee members for their 
support during my tenure and I look forward to continued progress 
in the future.

DFS Annual report & accounts 201851

Composition
The Audit Committee is chaired by Julie Southern and its  
other current members are Luke Mayhew and, more latterly,  
Alison Hutchinson who was appointed on 1 May 2018 to replace 
Gwyn Burr who stepped down on 30 April 2018.

The Governance Code recommends that all members of the Audit 
Committee are Non-Executive Directors, independent in character 
and judgement and free from any relationship or circumstance 
which may, could or would be likely to, or appear to, affect their 
judgement and that one such member has recent and relevant 
financial experience. The Board considers that, by virtue of her 
current and former executive and non-executive roles, details of 
which are set out on page 39, Julie Southern has recent and 
relevant financial experience and the Company complies with the 
requirements of the Governance Code in this respect. Furthermore, 
all Committee members have extensive relevant commercial and 
operational experience in large retail/customer-facing organisations 
which both benefit the Committee and collectively illustrate its 
competence relevant to the sector in which the Group operates.

Biographies of the Independent Non-Executive Directors are 
included on pages 38 and 39 and a summary of their principal 
skills and experience is shown on page 46.

The Chief Executive Officer, Chief Financial Officer and Chair of  
the Board attend meetings of the Audit Committee by invitation,  
as do KPMG LLP’s Audit Partner and members of the Executive 
Board and senior management as appropriate. The Company 
Secretary also attends by invitation in order to maintain a record  
of the meetings.

Roles and responsibilities

The Audit Committee assists the Board in discharging its 
responsibilities with regard to the oversight of:
• 
• 
•  compliance, whistleblowing and fraud; and
• 

financial reporting;
internal controls and risk management systems;

internal and external audit.

In particular, this includes:
•  monitoring the integrity of the financial statements of the 

Group, including its annual and half-yearly reports, and any 
other formal announcement relating to its financial 
performance including a review of any significant financial 
reporting judgements contained therein;

•  reviewing the Group’s processes and procedures for 

ensuring that material business risks are properly identified 
and managed;

•  reviewing the adequacy and effectiveness of the Group’s 
internal financial controls and risk management systems;

•  receiving regular reports on significant litigation and 

compliance issues;

•  reviewing the Group’s arrangements with regard to 

employee/contractor whistleblowing, fraud detection, 
prevention of bribery and money-laundering;

•  monitoring and reviewing the effectiveness of the Group’s 
internal audit function in the context of the Group’s overall 
risk management system;

•  overseeing the Group’s relationship with its external auditor, 
including their appointment, remuneration, independence 
and the effectiveness of the audit process; and

•  developing and implementing a policy on the supply of 

non-audit services by the external auditor.

The ultimate responsibility for reviewing and approving the 
annual report and accounts and the half-yearly reports 
remains with the Board. The Audit Committee will give due 
consideration to laws and regulations, the provisions of the  
UK Corporate Governance Code and the requirements of the 
Listing Rules.

The Audit Committee reviews the content of the annual report 
and accounts and advises the Board on whether, taken as  
a whole, they are fair, balanced and understandable and 
provide the information necessary for shareholders to assess 
the Company’s position and performance, business model 
and strategy.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 201852

Audit Committee report 
continued

Activities of the Audit Committee

The Audit Committee of the Group met three times during the year and attendance at those meetings is shown on page 47. At each 
meeting, standing agenda items relating to internal audit, reputational risk, whistleblowing and litigation issues were reviewed.

In addition, the other matters covered at each meeting are summarised in the table below:

September 2017
•  approval of the full year results for 
FY17, including reviews of going 
concern and the viability statement
•  review of the FY17 full year external 

audit, including KPMG LLP’s 
performance and subsequent 
re-appointment

•  review of the Group risk report
• 

initial consideration of the proposal  
to change the accounting year-end 
date

March 2018
• 

initial review of the implementation  
of the requirements of the General 
Data Protection Regulation 
•  review of the Group risk profile  

• 

update
initial review of the acquisition 
accounting for Sofology Ltd and 
KPMG LLP’s planning for its 
associated audit

June 2018
•  review and approval of KPMG LLP’s 

• 

continuing appointment, audit 
strategy and fees for the audit of the 
FY18 full year results
further review of the implementation  
of the requirements of the General 
Data Protection Regulation 
•  review of the Group risk report
•  review of the plan to implement  

the forthcoming changes to lease 
accounting under IFRS16
further consideration of the proposal to 
change the accounting year-end date

• 

•  review of the results of the  

externally-facilitated evaluation of  
the Committee’s effectiveness

Following the FY18 year end, at the September 2018 meeting, the 
Committee reviewed and approved, for consideration by the Board, 
the financial results for the 52 weeks ended 28 July 2018 including a 
review of the full year external audit. As part of that review process, 
the members of the Committee reviewed the Annual Report, the 
adequacy of the disclosure with respect to going concern and 
viability reporting in order to conclude whether the Annual Report 
taken as a whole was fair, balanced and understandable.

This additional review by the Audit Committee, supplemented by 
advice received from external advisors during the drafting process, 
assisted the Board in determining that the report was fair, balanced 
and understandable at the time that it was approved. The 
Committee considered the appropriateness of preparing the 
accounts on a going concern basis, including consideration of 
forecast plans and supporting assumptions and concluded that 
the Company’s financial position was such that it continued to be 
appropriate for accounts to be prepared on a going concern basis.

Significant issues considered in relation to the 
financial statements
The Committee, together with management and the Group’s 
external auditor, considered the following significant matters in 
relation to the financial statements and how these were addressed.

Acquisition accounting
During the year, the Group completed the acquisition of Sofology 
Limited, which significantly increased the amount of goodwill and 
intangible assets recognised in the Group’s financial statements. 
The application of accounting standards for acquisition accounting 
requires significant judgement in determining the value of the 
acquisition balance sheet and, in particular, the value of its 
component parts. In addition to management’s own procedures, 
the Group has engaged with external specialist advisors to support 
this valuation process which has been reviewed and agreed by the 
Group’s external auditor.

Impairment of intangible assets
The Group holds significant goodwill in the business following the 
acquisition of the DFS Group in 2010 by Advent and the DFS 
Group’s subsequent acquisition of The Sofa Workshop Limited 
and, more recently, Sofology Limited. In addition, the Group has 
recognised the value of the respective brands of Sofa Workshop, 
Dwell, DFS Spain and Sofology as intangible assets. As required  
by accounting standards, management have completed an annual 
impairment review of the carrying value of these assets for each 
cash-generating unit, and in total, details of which are set out in 
note 9 to the financial statements. This review concluded that  
no impairment charge was required.

Provisions
Several of the Group’s provisions, which primarily relate to the 
estimated cost of the retail customer guarantees provided, claims 
relating to historical sales of Payment Protection Insurance, and the 
valuation of finished goods stock, continue to require significant 
judgement in assessing their appropriateness and quantum. 
Management have considered the rationale and basis for these 
provisions to assess their reasonableness and adequacy which 
has been reviewed and agreed by the Group’s external auditor in 
conjunction with their substantive testing.

Viability reporting
The Committee, along with the Group’s external auditor, has 
reviewed management’s assessment of the prospects of the 
Group for the four years from 28 July 2018, being the period over 
which the various growth initiatives are anticipated to have a key 
impact and which corresponds to the normal planning cycle. This 
review included the challenging of assumptions and stress-testing 
of the scenario modelling and concluded that the Board is able to 
make the viability statement on page 17 of the Strategic Report.

DFS Annual report & accounts 201853

Assessment of effectiveness of the external 
audit process
The Audit Committee oversees the relationship with the external 
auditor and considers the re-appointment of the Company’s 
auditor, KPMG LLP, before making a recommendation to the  
Board to be put to shareholders. As part of this responsibility,  
the Committee approved the audit plan for the 52 weeks ended  
28 July 2018 and reviewed the auditor’s findings and management 
representation letters. Prior to recommending the appointment of 
KPMG LLP at the forthcoming AGM to the Board, the Audit 
Committee reviewed the audit process, the performance of the 
auditor and its ongoing independence, taking into consideration 
input from management, responses to questions from the 
Committee and the audit findings reported to the Committee. 
Based on this review, the Committee concluded that the external 
audit process had been run efficiently and that KPMG LLP has 
been effective in its role as external auditor.

Approach to appointing the external auditor and how 
objectivity and independence are safeguarded relative 
to non-audit services
The Audit Committee does not currently consider it necessary to 
have a bespoke policy for the rotation of the external audit firm 
other than continuing to comply with the audit tender rules 
applying to the Company.

Following the implementation of the EU Audit reforms, the Audit 
Committee has agreed a policy intended to maintain the 
independence and integrity of the Company’s auditor when acting 
as auditor of the Group’s accounts. The policy governs the 
provision of non-audit services provided by the auditor and, in 
summary, categorises the types of non-audit services as:
•  prohibited – services that have the potential to impair or 
appear to impair the independence of their audit role

•  permissible (subject to approval limits) – services which 

primarily relate to work that is outside the required scope of the 
statutory audit, but is consistent with the role of the external 
statutory auditor

•  services to be considered on case-by-case basis – all 
other services of an advisory or other nature that do not 
compromise the independence of the external auditor.

In any event, within each of the Group’s legal entities, the 
cumulative total of non-audit fees paid to the external auditors 
within each financial year must not exceed 70% of that financial 
year’s audit fee.

The above policy has been adhered to throughout the year.

Independence safeguards
The current audit firm was appointed while the Group was under 
private ownership and has served the DFS business for over 20 
years. In accordance with best ethical standards, external auditors 
are required to adhere to a rotation policy whereby the audit 
engagement partner is rotated after five years but can only serve 
for up to two years following the initial listing of the Group in  
March 2015. Therefore, our current external auditor, KPMG LLP, 
introduced a new engagement partner last year who, it is intended, 
will continue to take responsibility for the audit up to 2021.

The Company is fully committed to continually developing the 
highest standards of corporate governance and therefore the Audit 
Committee will continue to apply the practice that the audit should 
be put out to tender at least every ten years.

As a consequence, KPMG LLP may remain as external auditor until 
the completion of the 2025 annual audit, however, the Committee 
will continue to consider annually the need to tender the audit for 
audit quality or independence reasons. There are no contractual 
obligations in place that restrict the choice of statutory auditor.

The external auditor is also required periodically to assess whether, 
in its professional opinion, it is independent and those views are 
shared with the Audit Committee.

The Committee has authority to take independent advice as it 
deems appropriate in order to resolve issues on auditor 
independence. No such advice has been required to date.

Independence assessment by the Audit Committee
The Committee is satisfied that the independence of the external 
auditor is not impaired and notes that the audit firm’s engagement 
partner rotation policy has been complied with. Furthermore, the 
level of fees paid for non-audit services, details of which are set  
out in note 3 to the financial statements, does not jeopardise  
its independence.

The Committee has assessed the performance and independence 
of the external auditor and recommended to the Board the 
re-appointment of KPMG LLP as auditor until the AGM in 2019.

Internal audit
The scope and focus of the Internal Audit function continued to be 
developed during the year with an Internal Audit Director appointed 
to lead the strategy. The established subsidiary trading companies 
are fully integrated into the Group internal audit programme with 
the full integration of Sofology planned to be concluded during the 
first half of FY19.

As guided by the biannual review of the risk register/profile and 
specific business requirements, emphasis continues to be  
placed on:
•  key identified risk areas including sales culture and the 

associated compliance with GDPR and FCA regulations for 
credit broking, including complaints handling, along with Fire  
& Furniture Regulations compliance;

•  the store environment, particularly in relation to conduct risk;
•  Customer Distribution Centres (CDCs), particularly in relation  

to stock management; and

•  production and supply chain, to ensure consistent 

implementation of operational/compliance procedures, 
including Health and Safety.

Increased focus is placed on the corrective actions identified in 
audit reports to ensure standards are continually developed. In 
every case, clear ownership, coupled with strict deadlines, is 
complimented by an Internal Audit-owned verification process 
which must be completed before the action is closed. Improved 
risk-based audit planning is utilised to ensure the Internal Audit 
resource is used to best effect.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 201854

Audit Committee report 
continued

Internal audit reports continue to be issued to key management 
highlighting significant issues and making relevant 
recommendations. Separate monthly meetings are held with Retail 
and Supply chain management to ensure issues are proactively 
identified and the appropriate action taken. High level reporting is 
made to the Operating Board and Conduct & Compliance 
Committee on a monthly basis, and to the Audit Committee three 
times per year.

The effectiveness of the internal audit team, and its level of 
resource, is reviewed by the Committee at least annually. This 
assessment includes the ongoing review of the:
•  audit agenda and operational plans (including resource 

requirements);

•  results of the audit fieldwork and any significant issues 

highlighted; and

•  management of any corrective actions implemented.

Internal control and risk management
The Board is responsible for the overall system of internal controls 
for the Group and for reviewing its effectiveness. In accordance 
with FRC guidance, it carries out such a review at least annually, 
covering all material controls including financial, operational and 
compliance controls and risk management systems.

The system of internal controls is designed to manage rather than 
eliminate the risk of failure to achieve business objectives and can 
only provide reasonable and not absolute assurance against 
material misstatement or loss. The Group has operating policies 
and controls in place covering a range of issues including financial 
reporting, capital expenditure, business continuity and information 
technology, including cyber security, and appropriate employee 
policies. These policies are designed to ensure the accuracy and 
reliability of financial reporting and govern the preparation of 
financial statements.

In particular, a Conduct & Compliance committee (formerly a 
Reputational risk committee), comprising management from all 
relevant areas of the business, meets on a monthly basis to review 
key regulatory areas including:
•  complaints management relating to legacy Payment Protection 

Insurance issues;

•  FCA regulated credit broking activities relating to the provision 

of interest-free credit to customers;

•  data protection in all areas of the business, including the 

implementation and ongoing management of the General Data 
Protection Regulation;

•  health and safety across all business activities and premises; and
•  compliance with the Modern Slavery Act, within both internal 
manufacturing and supply chain operations as well as our 
external supplier base.

This committee places emphasis on key metrics and management 
information designed to provide oversight of performance and 
highlight any potential detriment or risk to the Company while seeking 
to achieve the very best customer outcomes and provide a safe 
environment for staff, customers and data alike. During the year, this 
management information has continued to be developed and refined 
in direct association with the ongoing review of the risk register.

The Board is ultimately responsible for the Group’s system of 
internal controls and risk management and discharges its duties in 
this area by:
•  holding regular Board meetings to consider the matters 

reserved for its consideration;

•  receiving regular management reports which provide an 

assessment of key risks and controls;

•  scheduling annual Board reviews of strategy including reviews 
of the material risks and uncertainties facing the business;
•  ensuring there is a clear organisational structure with defined 

responsibilities and levels of authority;

•  ensuring there are documented policies and procedures in 

place; and

•  scheduling regular Board reviews of financial budgets and 
forecasts with performance reported to the Board monthly.

In reviewing the effectiveness of the system of internal controls, the 
Committee will continue to:
•  review the risk register compiled and maintained by senior 

managers within the Group and question and challenge where 
necessary;

•  regularly review the system of financial and accounting controls; 

and

•  report to the Board on the risk and control culture within the 

Group.

In respect of the Group’s financial reporting, the Finance 
Department is responsible for preparing the Group financial 
statements using a well-established process and ensuring that 
accounting policies are in accordance with International Financial 
Reporting Standards. All financial information published by the 
Group is subject to the approval of the Audit Committee.

There have been no changes in the Company’s internal control 
during the financial year under review that have materially affected, 
or are reasonably likely to materially affect, the Company’s control 
over financial reporting.

The Board, with advice from the Audit Committee, is satisfied that 
an effective system of internal controls and risk management is in 
place which enable the Company to identify, evaluate and manage 
key risks and which accord with the guidance published by the 
FRC. These processes have been in place since the start of the 
financial year and up to the date of approval of the accounts. 
Further details of specific material risks and uncertainties facing the 
business can be found on pages 12 to 16.

Whistleblowing
The Group is committed to the highest standards of openness, 
honesty, integrity and accountability and, as a result, has a 
whistleblowing policy in place. This policy is intended to make 
employees or third parties aware that they should report any serious 
concerns or suspicions about any wrongdoing or malpractice on 
the part of any employee of the Group. Examples include fraud, 
breakdown in internal controls, misleading customers, bribery, 
dishonesty, corruption and breaches of data protection or health 
and safety. This facility was reviewed during the year and it was 
agreed that appropriate arrangements are in place for proportionate 
and independent investigation of such matters.

DFS Annual report & accounts 201855

During the year, there were five instances of whistleblowing all of 
which were fully investigated and addressed in accordance with 
the policy.

Control environment
The Board is committed to business integrity, high ethical and 
moral values and professionalism in all its activities. The Group has 
policies in place for:
•  anti-bribery;
•  equal opportunities; 
•  gifts and entertainment; and
•  share dealing.

In accordance with the obligations under the Reporting on 
Payment Practices and Performance Regulations 2017, the 
Company has submitted its bi-annual reports in line with the 
legislation during the year.

Following an externally-facilitated risk-assessment exercise, the 
Company has also reviewed its practices and processes in order 
to ensure that reasonable prevention procedures are in place to 
prevent the facilitation of tax evasion in line with the new Criminal 
Finances Act 2017.

DFS Furniture plc’s Modern Slavery Statement, which sets out 
details of the policies in relation to slavery and human trafficking, 
as well as its due diligence processes with its partners, has been 
published on the Company’s website (www.dfscorporate.co.uk).

The Company has also published its Tax Strategy Statement on 
the Company’s website (www.dfscorporate.co.uk) in compliance 
with its duty under the Finance Act 2016, which sets out details of 
the Company’s attitude to tax planning and tax risk.

Accountability
The Board is required to present a fair, balanced and 
understandable assessment of the Company’s financial position 
and prospects. The responsibilities of the Directors and external 
auditor are set out on pages 53 and 89. As set out in the Directors’ 
report, the Directors consider the Company’s business to be a 
going concern. The Company’s viability statement can be found on 
page 17.

Julie Southern
Chair of the Audit Committee
3 October 2018

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 201856

Nomination Committee report

This year, the Nomination Committee has  
focused on succession planning and 
leadership development.

Ian Durant
Chair of the 
Nomination
Committee
3 October 2018

2018 highlights

•  planning the succession of the Chief Executive

•  appointing a new Non-Executive Director

•  developing the strength of the senior 

management team

The Nomination Committee exists to ensure that the Group has  
the appropriate skills, knowledge, experience and diversity on the 
Board and in executive leadership positions, both now and in the 
future. This should enable DFS to operate and compete 
successfully, and to develop strategies and execute them 
effectively in a rapidly changing and challenging market.

This year, the Committee has focused on succession planning and 
leadership development primarily due Ian Filby’s decision to retire 
as Chief Executive Officer after 8 years of service. On behalf of  
the Board, I would like to express our sincere gratitude to Ian for his 
steadfast leadership over the years and, at the same time, welcome 
Tim Stacey to the Board, as his successor from November 2018.

Further Board changes during the year included the appointment 
of Alison Hutchinson, to succeed Gwyn Burr, as a Non-Executive 
Director and Chair of the Remuneration Committee. I would like to 
thank Gwyn for her support and Luke Mayhew for his transitional 
chairing of the Remuneration Committee and to welcome  
Alison Hutchinson to the Board.

The year has also seen further strengthening of the senior 
management team with Group roles on the Executive Board being 
developed to maximise the benefits of the enlarged brand portfolio 
and support the new Chief Executive Officer in achieving the 
Group’s strategic goals.

Finally, as part of the externally facilitated annual Board evaluation 
this year, the performance of the Nomination Committee was 
reviewed and I am pleased to report that there were no areas  
of concern and the results of the evaluation showed that the 
Committee was operating effectively.

Ian Durant
Chair of the Nomination Committee
3 October 2018

Composition
The Nomination Committee is chaired by Ian Durant and all of  
the Non-Executive Directors. Alison Hutchinson was appointed  
on 1 May 2018 to replace Gwyn Burr who stepped-down on  
30 April 2018.

The Governance Code recommends that a majority of the 
Nomination Committee be Non-Executive Directors, independent 
in character and judgement and free from any relationship or 
circumstance which may, could or would be likely to, or appear  
to, affect their judgement. As such, the Board considers that the 
Company complies with the Governance Code.

Only members of the Committee have the right to attend 
Committee meetings, but the Committee may invite others, 
including the Chief Executive Officer, the Chief People Officer and 
external advisers, to attend all or part of any meeting if it thinks it  
is appropriate or necessary or pursuant to the terms of any 
agreement with shareholders.

The Nomination Committee will meet as often as it deems necessary 
but, in accordance with its terms of reference, at least once a year.

Roles and responsibilities
The Nomination Committee is responsible for regularly reviewing 
the structure, size and composition of the Board and its 
committees (including an appraisal of skills, knowledge, experience 
and diversity, including gender) and for making recommendations 
to the Board with regard to any changes.

It is also responsible for identifying and nominating for the approval of 
the Board, candidates to fill Board vacancies as and when they arise.

The Committee’s terms of reference are available on the 
Company’s corporate website at www.dfscorporate.co.uk.

Activities of the Nomination Committee
The Nomination Committee formally met six times during the year 
and was advised on planning for the Chief Executive’s succession 
by Calibro Consulting (who have no connection with the Company or 
individual Director). The main activities of the Committee included:
•  management of the market-wide selection process, engaging 
the services of Spencer Stuart and YSC Consulting (neither 
of whom have a connection with the Company or individual 
Director), for the appointment of Tim Stacey as Chief Executive 
Officer Designate on 1 August 2018, and as Chief Executive 
Officer on 1 November 2018, to replace Ian Filby. Further  
details of this process are shown opposite;

DFS Annual report & accounts 201857

With regards to the replacement of Gwyn Burr as a Non-Executive 
Director, the Nomination Committee was advised by Spencer Stuart 
and a brief was developed based on an assessment of the strategy 
for the business, including the likely challenges in the years ahead, 
as well as defining the best cultural fit for success.

Several potential candidates were considered from which a short-list 
was prepared and subsequently met by the Nomination Committee. 
Given her extensive work with the retail industry and background in 
IT, retail financial services and marketing, Alison Hutchinson was 
recommended to the Board which was endorsed.

All new Directors are subject to an in-depth and tailored induction 
process.

Diversity
Whilst the Company pursues diversity, including gender diversity, 
throughout the business, the Board has not committed to any 
specific targets. However, we are pleased our Board continues to 
have three female Directors and therefore a 50:50 gender split.  
We will continue to give due consideration to talent, balance and 
diversity when making new appointments to the Board and look  
to this approach being applied across the business.

Ian Durant
Chair of the Nomination Committee
3 October 2018

•  management of the search and selection process, engaging  
the services of Spencer Stuart for the appointment of Alison 
Hutchinson on 1 May 2018, as an Independent Non-Executive 
Director and member of the Remuneration Committee (and to 
become Chair from 1 October 2018), to replace Gwyn Burr.  
Further details of this process are given below;

•  ongoing review of the talent and succession planning for the 

Board and senior management, including assessment of their 
training and development needs;

•  providing support and guidance to the new CEO Designate with 
regards to the development of his senior management team, 
resulting in recent additions to the Executive Board to include 
Group roles for Retail, Technology, Development and Supply 
Chain, along with the recruitment of an in-house General Counsel;

•  externally-facilitated review of the Committee’s effectiveness;
•  review of Directors’ time commitments and independence; and
•  consideration of the re-election of Directors at the AGM.

Recruitment process for CEO succession

As part of the CEO succession planning process, the Nomination 
Committee had previously identified two potential internal 
candidates who were provided with the appropriate preparation 
and support, including mentoring, during the year to develop 
their potential as a possible leader of the Group. Following this, 
the internal candidates also underwent a leadership 
assessment by YSC and interviews with Spencer Stuart.

Stage 1
During this time, a job description and person specification 
was prepared, considering the likely strategic direction of  
the Group, and Spencer Stuart reviewed the population of 
external candidates and formally reported back to the 
Nominations Committee on both internal and potential  
external candidates, from which a short-list was prepared.

Stage 2
Formal presentations were made by the short-listed 
candidates to the Nomination Committee, supported by the 
opinions of the retiring CEO who played no other part in the 
selection process, from which the Nomination Committee 
made a recommendation to the Board which was endorsed.

Stage 3
Throughout this process, the Nomination Committee 
proactively considered transition management issues in order 
to ensure the handover to the new Chief Executive Officer  
is as smooth as possible, given the challenging market 
conditions prevailing in the upholstery furniture sector  
and the choice of an internal candidate.

This involved regular liaison with the Remuneration  
Committee and agreeing a transition plan which involves  
Ian Filby becoming Chair of the Board of Sofology, from  
1 November 2018, but continuing to provide support to the 
new CEO until October 2019. Although Ian Filby will not  
attend DFS Group Board meetings after 1 November 2018,  
he will be available to provide valuable counsel to the  
Board as well as management during the coming year.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 2018 
58

Directors’ remuneration report

The revised Policy increases the alignment  
of management’s interests with shareholders’ 
long-term return.

Luke Mayhew
Interim Chair of the  
Remuneration 
Committee
3 October 2018

This report has been prepared in accordance with Schedule 
8 to the Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups 
(Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008 as amended in 
2013, the provisions of the current Code and the Listing 
Rules.

Contents
Part A: Annual statement
Part B: Remuneration at a glance 
Part C: Our remuneration policy 
Part D: 2018 annual report on remuneration

1.  Executive Director Remuneration
2.  Implementation of Remuneration Policy for the 

Executive Directors for 2019

3.  Consideration by the Committee of matters 
relating to Directors’ Remuneration for 2018

4.  Chief Executive Officer and employee pay
5.  Pay fairness throughout the Group
6.  Non-Executive Director Remuneration
7.  Directors’ shareholding and share interests
8.  Outstanding share awards
9.  Shareholder voting

58

75

75

77

78
79
80
80
81
82
82

Part A: Annual statement

Dear Shareholder

DFS had a satisfactory first half of the year. However, tough trading 
conditions over the summer months and the wider challenges 
faced by the UK retail market have meant that the financial results 
did not meet targets. Despite that the business made good 
progress on its longer term strategic priorities. 

As last year, the annual bonus was modest and there has been no 
payout under the Long-Term Incentive Plan (“LTIP”) award. 

Key financial results FY18
•  Gross sales £1,125.6m (FY17: £990.8m)
•  Revenue £870.5m (FY17: £762.7m)
•  Underlying EBITDA £76.1m (FY17: £82.4m)
•  Underlying profit before tax £37.2m (FY17: £50.1m)
•  Underlying earnings per share 14.0p (FY17: 18.7p)

Historic remuneration outcomes

CEO (Ian Filby)

2018

2017

2016

2015

Single figure (£000)
Annual bonus (% of salary)
LTIP vesting (% of salary)

Single figure (£000)
Annual bonus (% of salary)
LTIP vesting (% of salary)

673

666
36.0% 37.5%
0%

0%

804

790
71.9% 85.2%
n/a1

n/a1

CFO (Nicola Bancroft)

2018

2017

20162

20152

429

388
34.8% 38.0%
0%

0%

n/a
n/a
n/a1

n/a
n/a
n/a1

During the year we announced that Ian Filby, the CEO, would be 
retiring and he would be succeeded by Tim Stacey. Tim has been 
part of the DFS senior management team for seven years. He takes 
over as CEO on 1 November. The details of Tim’s remuneration 
package are set out on page 79. We have deliberately started Tim’s 
salary at a lower level than Ian’s to reflect that this is his first CEO 
position. We have however, set out how that salary will increase to 
bring it to an appropriate level as he gains experience. Any such 
increase would depend on acceptable company performance.

It has also been two years since Nicola Bancroft was appointed as 
CFO and during the year the Committee reviewed Nicola’s base 
salary in line with the commitment we made on her appointment to 
bring her salary to a level more in line with her peers as she 
became experienced in her role. Detailed information on this is set 
out on page 60 of this Annual Statement.

1.  No LTIP was due to vest. 
2.  Nicola Bancroft was not an Executive Director in 2015 or 2016.

DFS Annual report & accounts 201859

This year we have conducted a comprehensive review of the 
Remuneration Policy (“Policy”), consulting with major shareholders. 
We concluded that, despite the relatively low payouts since the 
IPO, the Policy was still largely fit for purpose. We are confident 
that the revised Policy has sufficient flexibility within it to support 
the future of the business while still giving clarity to shareholders.  
It was also important to the Committee that the Policy not only 
enables management to be rewarded for the delivery of strong 
financial performance and shareholder returns in a challenging 
economic environment but increases the alignment of 
management’s interests with shareholders’ long-term return. 

Summary of key changes to the Policy 

•  Bonus: Maximum annual opportunity may increase in 

steps over 2 years from 100% of salary to 120% from FY20 
– at the point the opportunity increases, deferral into shares 
for 3 years will be introduced (deferral will apply where the 
bonus payment is greater than 75% of salary); 

•  LTIP: Introduction of a 2 year post-vesting holding period 

(for LTIP awards granted from 2018); 

•  Minimum shareholding guidelines: Increased from 

200% of salary to 250%; and

•  Recruitment and promotions: Reduction of the maximum 

variable remuneration from 450% of salary to 350%.

We consider the increase of the maximum bonus opportunity to 
120% of salary from 100% is appropriate. However, we do not 
want to implement that increase immediately on the CEO’s 
appointment; any increase to the bonus would only happen from 
2019 in stages if the Board believes company performance has 
been satisfactory. An element of deferral into shares for three year 
will be introduced at the same time as any increase.

The current Policy allows LTIP awards of up to 150% of salary and 
we have applied this level for the incoming CEO with the CFO’s 
LTIP increasing to 120% of salary. All the LTIP awards to be 
granted from 2018 will be subject to a two year post-vesting 
holding period. The Board is reviewing the future strategy with the 
new CEO; for this reason the LTIP awards for 2018 will be granted 
later than usual and performance targets will be communicated 
when the awards are granted (expected to be no later than mid 
November 2018). 

As part of the Policy review, we consulted extensively with our 
major shareholders and representative bodies and listened to their 
views. We are pleased that the vast majority of shareholders with 
whom we engaged are supportive of the Policy and feel the changes 
being proposed are justified and measured. 

In this year’s report, we have included a new section on pay 
fairness throughout the Group including details about DFS’ 
employee value proposition, gender pay gap statistics and  
DFS’ diversity policy. The Company has been focused on 
increasing opportunities for all; there is much more work to do  
and this will continue to be high on the agenda of the Committee  
in the year ahead. 

As discussed on pages 30-31, the Company is changing its 
accounting record date to 30 June and therefore, FY19 will be 11 
months. The Committee has considered the impact of the year end 
change when setting financial targets for the FY19 bonus and we 
will provide relevant details of financial and non-financial targets in 
next year’s Director’s Remuneration Report. 

I am writing this report as Interim Committee Chair. I took over in 
April from Gwyn Burr who retired from the Board. In May, we 
welcomed Alison Hutchinson to the Board and to the Committee. 
Alison formally took over from me as Committee Chair on 
1 October 2018. 

I would like to thank the shareholders who we have engaged with 
for their time and valuable input. The Board recommend the 
Report and revised Policy to shareholders. 

Luke Mayhew
Senior Independent Director
Interim Chair of the Remuneration Committee
3 October 2018

What remuneration decisions did we make as a 
result of performance over 2018?

It has been a challenging year for the Group with external factors 
leading to significantly lower than expected order intake and 
macroeconomic factors placing pressure on the industry as a 
whole. This has been reflected in the modest bonus outcomes and 
the continued lack of an LTIP payout. 

The 2018 Annual Bonus was dependent on performance against 
stretching targets for revenue, underlying profit before tax, cash 
flow, Net Promoter Score and personal performance targets (each 
measure is equally weighted at 20%). The Committee agreed that 
Ian Filby and Nicola Bancroft would receive a cash bonus equal to 
36.0% and 34.8% of the maximum opportunity, respectively. 
Details of the financial and personal performance measures and 
targets can be found on page 76.

As noted earlier, the Committee also assessed relative TSR 
performance and EPS growth over a three-year performance 
period for the 2015 LTIP awards. Disappointingly, both the relative 
TSR and EPS growth targets were not met and as a result, vesting 
was nil and the awards lapsed in full. 

What changes are we proposing to the 
Remuneration Policy? 

During the year, the Committee conducted a detailed review of 
remuneration arrangements for the Executive Directors and 
considered what changes, if any, should be made to the Policy. As 
part of the review process, we consulted with our largest 
shareholders and the main representative bodies (Glass Lewis, the 
IA and ISS) to listen to and understand their points of view on our 
proposals. The proposed Policy remains largely unchanged except 
for a number of modest changes.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 201860

Directors’ remuneration report 
continued

Part A: Annual statement continued

Summary of changes to the Policy 

•  Annual Bonus: The bonus opportunity for FY19 remains 

100% of salary but from FY20 onwards, it is proposed that 
the maximum annual opportunity will increase in steps over 
2 years from 100% to 120% of salary but only if the 
corporate performance has been satisfactory in the 
Board’s view. At the point the opportunity increases, annual 
bonus deferral into shares for three years will be introduced 
with deferral applying on the portion of the bonus payment 
that is greater than 75% of salary. 

•  LTIP: For LTIP awards granted from FY19, a 2 year 

post-vesting holding period will be introduced. The holding 
period will continue beyond an Executive Director’s 
cessation of employment. 

•  Minimum shareholding requirement: From FY19, 

minimum shareholding requirements will increase from 
200% to 250% of salary for both the CEO and the CFO. 
•  Maximum variable remuneration for recruitment and 
promotions: This will be reduced from 450% of salary (i.e., 
annual bonus and LTIP awards) to 350% of salary and as a 
result, there will be a reduction in the maximum LTIP award 
in exceptional circumstances from 300% to 230% of salary. 

The proposed changes are set out in detail in this report on page 
62.

What are the other key remuneration decisions 
we made in 2018? 

Remuneration arrangements for the incoming CEO 
The Committee reviewed Tim Stacey’s remuneration package in 
line with the Policy and made the following decisions in respect of 
FY19: 

Tim Stacey – remuneration package

Base salary 
Pension

Annual bonus 
LTIP 
Shareholding requirement

£400,000 p.a.
£50,000 p.a.  
(capped fixed contribution)
100% of base salary
150% of base salary
250% of base salary

As Tim is an internal appointment, the Committee considered it 
right to set his salary at a lower level compared to his predecessor. 
However, we want to be transparent to shareholders now that the 
intention is to increase Tim’s salary to £440,000 p.a. on a stepped 
basis over a two-year period subject to corporate performance 
being deemed satisfactory by the Board. This will result in 
increases to his base salary for those two years that are likely to 
exceed that of the wider workforce.

The Committee has also increased the LTIP award levels to 150% 
of base salary to bring the CEO role in line with the maximum 
allowed for under the current Policy. The Committee at the same 
time has applied a two-year holding period. We believe this and the 
increased shareholding guidelines provide stronger alignment for 
the CEO with the long-term interests of shareholders. 

Changes to CFO remuneration 
The Committee reviewed Nicola’s remuneration package in line 
with the approved Policy and made the following decisions in 
respect of FY19: 

Nicola Bancroft – remuneration package 

Base salary 
Pension

Annual bonus 
LTIP 
Shareholding requirement

£300,000 p.a.
£40,000 p.a.  
(capped fixed contribution)
100% of base salary
120% of base salary
250% of base salary

On appointment as CFO in August 2016, the Committee 
determined that Nicola’s salary would be £240,000 p.a. and that it 
in line with the approved Policy, her salary would be reviewed 
annually. As set out in the 2016 Directors’ Remuneration Report, it 
was always the Committee’s intention that over time and subject to 
performance, Nicola’s salary would be adjusted to a level more in 
line with peers in the industry. This supports the Committee’s 
principle that Executive Directors appointed internally should start 
on a lower remuneration package and graduate to the appropriate 
level after a few years, subject to Company performance.

In 2017, the Committee decided, taking into account the 
Company’s wider financial performance at that time, that Nicola 
would receive a salary increase of 2% which was in line with the 
average increase awarded to the wider employee group. As a 
result, Nicola’s salary at the start of the 2018 Financial Year was 
£244,800. 

The Committee undertook a further review of Nicola’s salary in 
2018. The review confirmed that Nicola’s salary was still positioned 
well below her peers and was either at or below the lower quartile 
when compared to similar sized companies in the FTSE SmallCap 
and FTSE General Retailers of a similar size. 

Therefore, in line with the commitment made on Nicola’s 
appointment as CFO and the current Policy, the Committee 
determined that it was appropriate to increase Nicola’s salary to 
£300,000 p.a. with effect from 1 February 2018. The Committee will 
continue to review Nicola’s salary in line with the approved Policy. 

Remuneration arrangements for the outgoing CEO 
The Committee also considered remuneration arrangements for 
Ian Filby during the year. Ian will be stepping down as CEO 
effective 31 October 2018 and details of his leaving arrangements 
will be disclosed on the DFS corporate website then and in next 
year’s Directors’ Remuneration Report. Ian will continue to provide 
the Group with his extensive business experience and expertise 
including taking on the role of part-time Chairman of Sofology and 
driving the continued integration of Sofology into the Group. All 
arrangements with Ian Filby are within the framework of the 
approved Policy.

DFS Annual report & accounts 201861

2018 LTIP awards
We will be retaining relative TSR and EPS growth in the LTIP (each 
measure will continue to be weighted at 50%). The Committee has 
reviewed the comparator groups within the TSR measure and 
discussed this specifically with shareholders. We have decided 
that looking ahead over the next three years the UK retail sector is 
the more relevant group. Therefore, for the 2018 LTIP award, the 
split between the FTSE 350 General Retailers Index and the FTSE 
250 Index (excluding Investment Trusts) will be 35:15 (50% of the 
LTIP award). 

We have not yet set EPS growth targets for the 2018 LTIP awards 
because the new CEO and the Board of Directors are in the 
process of reviewing our long-term business plan. Accordingly,  
the 2018 LTIP grants will be delayed this year, however, we will 
communicate performance targets to shareholders when we grant 
the LTIP awards in November 2018.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 201862

Part B: Remuneration at a glance 

i. Summary of implementation of the Remuneration Policy for FY19 and key changes to the Policy 
The section below summarises the implementation of the Remuneration Policy for FY19 for the Executive Directors as well as the minor 
changes we are proposing to make to the Policy with their supporting rationale. Note, throughout this report we have included details  
of FY18 outcomes for Ian Filby who will be the CEO until 31 October 2018. Tim Stacey will be formally appointed to the Board on  
1 November 2018 and was not an Executive Director during FY18 and so details regarding his remuneration outcomes for FY18 are  
not set out.

Element

Changes we have made to the Policy 

Rationale 

Implementation for FY19

Executive Directors

Base salary 

•  The Policy clarifies that individuals 

•  Consistent with existing Policy in 

who are recruited or promoted to the 
Board may have their salaries set 
below the targeted Policy level until 
they become established in their role. 
Subsequent increases in salary may 
be higher than the general rises for 
employees until the target positioning 
is achieved.

respect for recruitment and 
promotions. Allows for flexibility to set 
salary at appropriate levels for newly 
recruited/promoted individuals. 

Benefits and pension

•  Maximum pension contributions are 

•  Allows for the flexibility to review 

unchanged but the Policy will provide 
the Committee with the flexibility to 
review the approach for new joiners to 
ensure it is aligned with best practice.

operation of the pension Policy in  
the future to ensure it takes into 
account corporate governance best 
practice/market practice.

Annual bonus 

•  Maximum awards will be increased in 
steps to 120% of base salary over the 
Policy period, subject to company 
performance. Where there is an 
increase to the maximum bonus, this 
will be accompanied by the 
introduction of bonus deferral into 
shares for three years. Deferral will 
apply where the bonus payment is 
greater than 75% of salary. 

•  Flexibility to increase to the maximum 
bonus opportunity from 100% to 
120% of base salary is part of a 
modest rebalancing of remuneration 
towards variable pay and ensures that 
levels can be adjusted to more market 
competitive levels. The ability to defer 
into shares has been introduced to 
provide further alignment with 
shareholder interests and to ensure 
the overall remuneration framework is 
aligned with corporate governance 
best practice. 

LTIP

•  Introduction of 2 year post vesting 

•  The holding period helps ensure 

LTIP holding periods - this will apply to 
all LTIP grants from 2018 onwards. 
•  Maximum variable remuneration for 

recruitment and promotion awards in 
exceptional circumstances have been 
reduced to 230% of base salary from 
300%. 

greater and sustained alignment with 
shareholder value and aligns the 
overall remuneration framework with 
corporate governance best practice. 
•  The Committee recognises that in the 
current environment it is important to 
exercise restraint in relation quantum 
and felt reducing the overall maximum 
in exceptional circumstances was 
appropriate. 

•  CEO (Ian Filby): £449,670 p.a.
•  CEO Designate (Tim Stacey): 

£400,000 p.a. 

•  CFO: £300,000 p.a. 

•  CEO: £50,000 p.a. 
•  CEO Designate: £50,000 p.a. 
•  CFO: £40,000 p.a. 

Pensions are in the form of fixed 
contributions which are capped at the 
above levels.  Benefits will be in line with 
the Policy. 

•  CEO: 100% of base salary 
•  CFO: 100% of base salary 

Bonuses will be in the form of cash and 
assessed over one financial year with 
pay-outs based on the achievement of a 
range of financial and non-financial 
targets: 
– Revenue (15%)
– Profit before tax (25%)
– Cash Flow (20%)
– Net Promoter Score (20%) 
– Personal objectives (20%)

•  This year we have shifted a higher 

proportion of the financial component 
of the annual bonus into PBT and 
reduced the proportion in relation to 
revenue.

•  CEO: 150% of base salary 
•  CFO: 120% of base salary 

Awards vest after three years subject to 
the achievement of performance 
measures (see above for discussion on 
2018 LTIP awards). Post-vesting holding 
period for two years will apply. 

Minimum shareholding 
requirement 

•  Increase from 200% to 250% of salary 
for Executive Directors to be built over 
five years.

•  Recognises the importance of aligning 
the long-term interests of Executive 
Directors with shareholders.

•  CEO: 250% of salary 
•  CFO: 250% of salary 

Non-Executive Directors

Fees

•  None

•  None

•  Chairman: £180,000
•  Senior Independent Director: £60,000
•  Audit/Remuneration Committee Chair: 

£57,000

•  Independent Non-Executive Director: 

£50,000

The full Policy is set on pages 65 to 74 and this includes detailed information on key changes to the Policy. 

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018Directors’ remuneration report continued63

ii. Key FY18 business highlights and impact on incentive plan results 
The bonus targets for FY18 were determined prior to the acquisition of Sofology in November 2017 and accordingly were based on the 
expected performance of the pre-acquisition Group only. The financial results discussed below, including the targets and actual 
performance for FY18 therefore also exclude the contribution of Sofology to the Group’s reported results for FY18.

•  Revenue decreased by 2.0% to £747.7 million;
•  Underlying EBITDA decreased by 11.9% to £72.6 million;
•  £32.3 million cash flow; and
•  Established Customer Net Promotor Score up from 34.2% to 35.8%.

FY18 annual bonus assessment: At the start of the 2018 Financial Year, we set stretching performance targets for the Annual Bonus 
plan. Below we summarise the targets and the outcomes for both Ian Filby and Nicola Bancroft.

Targets

£761.7m
£52.8m
£36.5m
36.1%
see below

Actual

% of maximum achieved

£747.7m
£38.4m
£32.3m
34.8%
see below

Measure (weighting)

Revenue (20%)
PBT (20%)
Cash flow (20%)
Net Promoter Score (20%)
Personal (20%)

Ian Filby

Nicola Bancroft

Four personal objectives were set in 
relation to the following areas:  
(i) property strategy; (ii) senior 
leadership development; (iii) online 
progress; and (iv) integration of 
customer acquisition with brand 
portfolio. All personal objectives are 
equally weighted. 

See page 76 for a detailed 
description of personal targets for 
FY18. 

Four personal objectives were set in 
relation to the following areas:  
(i) cash management; (ii) the 
Sofology acquisition; (iii) the 4-year 
business plan and (iv) strategic KPIs 
and management of external 
stakeholders. All personal objectives 
are equally weighted. 

See page 76 for a detailed 
description of personal targets for 
FY18.

Three out of the four personal objectives 
were achieved in full during FY18.

The only objective that was not achieved 
in full was “integration of customer 
acquisition with brand portfolio”. The 
Committee determined that there was 
partial achievement in relation to this 
objective. This was evidenced through 
work undertaken on the assessment of 
the Group’s brand portfolio and brand 
positioning and the development of 
action plans for each brand. 

Three out of the four personal objectives 
set were achieved in full during FY18.

The only objective that was not achieved 
in full was “cash management”. The 
Committee determined there was partial 
achievement, as strong progress was 
still made in relation to this objective. 
This was evidenced through 
achievements such as cash savings, 
minimisation of interest charges and 
effective working capital management. 

24.9%
0%
0%
61.5%
see below

93.8%

87.5%

Based on an assessment against the FY18 bonus scorecard the Committee determined that Ian Filby would receive a bonus of £157,933 
(36.0% of maximum) and £94,517 for Nicola Bancroft (34.8% of maximum).

The FY18 bonuses for Ian Filby and Nicola Bancroft will be paid in cash.

LTIP vesting: The 2015 award was granted in October 2015 and was assessed against relative TSR and EPS growth performance 
targets at the end of FY18. Based on the assessment of actual performance against targets, the final level of vesting of these awards was 
determined to be nil.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 201864

iii. Levels of remuneration for 2018 and executive shareholdings
Single figure remuneration and maximum remuneration opportunity
The charts below illustrate how the 2018 total single figure of remuneration for the CEO and CFO compared to the maximum potential 
opportunity in accordance with the Remuneration Policy that applied in the year.

1600

1400

1200

1000

800

600

400

200

0

0
0
0
’
£

2018 Maximum Opportunity

2018 Actual

800

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

0

Base Salary

Taxable Benefits

Bonus

Long-Term Incentive

Pension

Other

2018 Maximum Opportunity

2018 Actual

Ian Filby

Nicola Bancroft

Notes 
1   Other payment for Nicola Bancroft represents the allowance she is in entitled to for opting for a lower value company car (Nicola is entitled to an allowance for the difference)
2   The LTIP award used for the 2018 maximum opportunity for Nicola Bancroft is based on the conditional shares she was granted in October 2015 (Nicola was not a Board 

Director at this point) 

Level of shareholdings
Below we present a summary of the level of shareholdings for both the Executive Directors at 28 July 2018.

y
b

l
i

F
n
a

I

Shareholding requirement

200%

Value of beneficially owned shares

621%

t
f
o
r
c
n
a
B
a
o
c
N

l

i

Shareholding requirement

200%

Value of beneficially owned shares

315%

0

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

% of base salary

At the year end the value of both Executive Directors’ shares exceeded the shareholding requirement of 200% of salary as well as the 
proposed requirement of 250% under the new Policy. 

iv. Alignment of strategy and remuneration 
The Group’s focus is to deliver long-term, sustainable growth for shareholders; key to this are five growth levers that are core elements of 
our long-term strategy. As part of the Remuneration Policy review, the Committee carefully considered these five growth levers and 
whether the incentive structure sufficiently supports their development and execution. The Committee was of the view that the 
performance measures within the annual bonus and LTIP do directly relate to the delivery of the five growth levers. The following table 
sets out the performance measures chosen for the annual bonus and LTIP and how these align with these strategic priorities. 

Enhance our 
omnichannel 
proposition 
and maintain 
online 
leadership

Broadening our 
sales product 
and brand 
appeal

Exploit UK and 
ROI revenue 
roll-out 
opportunities

Full utilisation 
of store retail 
space and 
distribution 
cost efficiency 

Establish 
presence in 
international 
markets

Measure (weighting)

Annual 
Bonus

Revenue (15%)

Profit before tax (25%)

Cash flow (20%)

Net Promoter Score (20%)

LTIP

Personal (20%)

EPS growth (50%)

Relative TSR (50%)

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018Directors’ remuneration report continued 
 
65

PART C: OUR REMUNERATION POLICY
The following section sets out the Directors’ Remuneration Policy, which is to be subject to a binding ordinary resolution to the AGM of 
the Company to be held in November 2018 and will take effect following the AGM. The Policy is intended to apply for three years from the 
date of approval. All awards granted under the previous Directors’ Remuneration Policy will be honoured as will any legacy arrangements 
for the Executive Directors.

The Remuneration Policy has been prepared in accordance with Schedule 8 to the Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups 
(Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008 as amended in 2013, the provisions of the current Code and the Listing Rules.

Remuneration principles 
The Committee concluded that the Company’s remuneration principles remain appropriate and that the proposed Remuneration Policy 
is in line with the relevant principles. The remuneration principles are set out below: 
•  Attract, motivate and retain Executives and senior management in order to deliver the Company’s strategic goals and business outputs. 
•  Encourage and support a high-performance sales and service culture ensuring good customer outcomes. 
•  Reward delivery of the Company’s business plan and key strategic goals.
•  Adhere to the principles of good corporate governance and appropriate risk management.
•  Align employees with the interests of shareholders and other external stakeholders and encourage widespread equity ownership 

amongst the Group. 

Changes to the Remuneration Policy 
In the Chairman’s statement and on page 62 we have set out the key changes that are being proposed to the levels and structure of 
remuneration under the Policy. Note that the Committee has made a number of changes to wording in the Policy to ensure that its 
operation is aligned with provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code (e.g. the Code expects the Committee to be able to override 
formulaic outcomes of incentives and this is reflected in the annual bonus and LTIP). 

Remuneration Policy Table

Base salary

Element, purpose and link to strategy

To provide competitive fixed remuneration that will attract and retain key employees and reflect their experience and
position in the Group

Operation

Salaries are reviewed annually, and any changes normally take effect from 1 October.

When determining the salary of the Executives the Committee takes into consideration:
•  the performance of the individual Executive Director;
•  the individual Executive Director’s experience and responsibilities;
•  pay and conditions throughout the Group, including the level of salary increases awarded to other employees; and 
•  the levels of base salary for similar positions with comparable status, responsibility and skills, in organisations of 

broadly similar size and complexity.

Maximum opportunity

Annual percentage increases are generally consistent with the range awarded across the Group.

Percentage increases in salary above this level may be made in certain circumstances, such as a change in 
responsibility or a significant increase in the role’s scale or the Group’s size and complexity.

Individuals who are recruited or promoted to the Board may have their salaries set below the targeted Policy level 
until they become established in their role. In such cases subsequent increases in salary may be higher than the 
general rises for employees until the target positioning is achieved.

Performance measures/assessment 
and recovery provisions

A broad assessment of individual and business performance is used as part of the salary review.
No recovery provisions apply.

Benefits

Element, purpose and link to strategy

To provide competitive benefits and to attract and retain high calibre employees.

Operation

Reviewed periodically to ensure benefits remain market competitive. 

Benefits currently include: 
•  Car and fuel allowance; 
•  Life insurance; 
•  Directors’ & Officers’ liability insurance; 
•  Private medical insurance (including cover for spouses and dependants); 
•  Professional subscriptions; 
•  Critical illness cover; 
•  Staff discounts; and 
•  Other minor benefits as provided from time to time, including seasonal gifts. 

Maximum opportunity

Benefit values vary year-on-year depending on premiums and the maximum potential value is the cost of the 
provision of these benefits. 

Performance measures/assessment 
and recovery provisions

No performance or recovery provisions apply.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 201866

Pension

Element, purpose and link to strategy

To provide a competitive Company contribution that enables effective retirement planning.

Operation

Pension is provided by way of a contribution to a personal pension scheme or cash allowance in lieu of pension 
benefits. 

Maximum opportunity

The maximum contribution to a personal pension scheme or cash in lieu is equal to £50,000.

The Committee may review pension contributions for new joiners to the Board to ensure the approach is aligned 
with corporate governance best practice/market practice.

Performance measures/assessment 
and recovery provisions

Annual bonus

No performance or recovery provisions apply.

Element, purpose and link to strategy

Incentivises achievement of annual objectives which support the Group’s short-term performance goals.

Operation

Bonus awards are granted annually following the signing of the Report and Accounts, usually in October.

Performance period is one financial year with pay-out determined by the Committee following the year end, based 
on achievement against a range of financial and non-financial targets.

The Committee can determine that part of the bonus earned under the annual bonus is provided as an award of 
shares under the Deferred Bonus Plan.

If the Committee determines that deferral will apply, the main terms are: 
•  Deferral will apply where the bonus payment is greater than 75% of salary; 
•  The minimum deferral period is three years; and 
•  Vesting is conditional on the participant’s continued employment with the Group at the end of the deferral period 
unless he or she is a “good leaver” (specific circumstances are set out on page 71 in the “Payments for loss of 
office” policy). 

The Committee may award dividend equivalents on those shares to Plan participants to the extent that they vest.

Maximum opportunity

Maximum awards under the Annual Bonus are equal up to 120% of salary.

Threshold performance: 0% of maximum.

Where maximum awards are increased above 100% of salary, then the Committee will determine that bonus 
deferral shall apply to part of the annual bonus earned.

Performance measures/assessment 
and recovery provisions

Performance targets will be set by the Committee annually based on a range of financial and non-financial 
measures. 

Financial targets govern the majority of bonus payments, which may include those related to profit, cash flow and 
revenue. Non-financial measures may include customer satisfaction targets and individual personal objectives.

The Committee will also determine the weighting of the measures to ensure that they support the business strategy 
and objectives for the relevant year.

The Committee has the discretion to adjust targets or performance measures or weightings for any exceptional 
events that may occur during the performance year if there is a significant and material event which causes the 
Committee to believe the original measures, weightings and targets are no longer appropriate.

The Committee retains discretion in exceptional circumstances to change performance measures and targets and 
the weightings attached to performance measures part-way through a performance period if there is a significant 
and material event which causes the Committee to believe the original measures, weightings and targets are no 
longer appropriate.

Discretion may also be exercised in cases where the Committee believes that the outcome is not a fair and accurate 
reflection of business performance. The exercise of this discretion may result in a downward or upward movement 
in the amount of the bonus pay-out resulting from the application of the performance measures. 

Any adjustments or discretion applied by the Committee will be fully disclosed in the following year’s 
Remuneration Report.

In accordance with the rules of the Deferred Annual Bonus Plan, malus and clawback provisions apply at the 
discretion of the Committee where the Committee considers such action is reasonable and appropriate. 
Circumstances where malus and/or clawback could apply include: a participant’s material underperformance, 
material brand or reputational damage, material misstatement of the accounts, gross misconduct by the participant 
and fraud or any other reason as determined by the Committee.

Malus applies before the determination of the bonus or the vesting of any deferred component under the bonus. 
Clawback applies up until three years after the date of any cash bonus payment. Malus and clawback will continue 
to apply following cessation of employment. 

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018Directors’ remuneration report continued67

LTIP

Element, purpose and link to strategy

The DFS Furniture plc 2015 Long-Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) incentivises executives to achieve superior returns to 
shareholders over a three-year period, to retain key individuals and align their interests with shareholders.

Operation

Under the LTIP, the Committee may award annual grants of performance share awards in the form of nil-cost 
options or conditional shares (LTIP Awards) on an annual basis.

LTIP awards under the plan will vest after a three year performance period subject to the achievement of the 
performance measures.

A two year holding period will apply following the three year vesting period for LTIP Awards granted to the Executive 
Directors. Upon vesting, sufficient shares can be sold to pay tax. 

Participants may be entitled to dividend equivalents representing the dividends paid during the performance period 
on LTIP awards that have vested.

Maximum opportunity

Maximum LTIP Awards are equal to 150% of base salary.

In exceptional circumstances, the Committee retains the discretion to increase this to 230% of salary.

Targets are typically structured as a challenging sliding scale, with no more than 20% of the maximum award 
vesting for achieving the threshold performance level through to full vesting for substantial out-performance of the 
threshold.

Performance measures/assessment 
and recovery provisions

Awards vest based performance against challenging targets, aligned with the delivery of the Company’s long-term 
strategy.

Adjusted EPS and Relative Total Shareholder Return measures will determine the vesting of awards granted in any 
year (50% weighting for each measure).

The Committee will review performance measures annually, in terms of the range of targets, the measures 
themselves and weightings applied to each element of the LTIP. Any revisions to the metrics and/or weightings will 
only take place if it is necessary because of developments in the Group’s strategy and, where these are material, 
following dialogue with the major shareholders.

The Committee retains discretion in exceptional circumstances to change performance measures and targets and 
the weightings attached to performance measures part-way through a performance period if there is a significant 
and material event which causes the Committee to believe the original measures, weightings and targets are no 
longer appropriate. 

Discretion may also be exercised in cases where the Committee believes that the outcome is not a fair and accurate 
reflection of business performance. The exercise of this discretion may result in a downward or upward movement 
in the amount of the LTIP vesting resulting from the application of the performance measures.

Any adjustments or discretion applied by the Committee will be fully disclosed in the following year’s Remuneration 
Report. 

In accordance with the rules of the LTIP, malus and clawback provisions apply at the discretion of the Committee 
where the Committee considers such action is reasonable and appropriate. 

Circumstances where malus and/or clawback could apply include: a participant’s material underperformance, 
material brand or reputational damage, material misstatement of the accounts, gross misconduct by the participant 
and fraud or any other reason as determined by the Committee. 

Malus applies before the vesting of any LTIP award. Clawback applies up until three years after the date of vesting. 
Malus and clawback will continue to apply following cessation of employment.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 201868

All-employee incentives

Element, purpose and link to strategy

Encourage all employees to become shareholders and thereby align their interests with shareholders.

Operation

Eligible employees may participate in the SAYE and Share Incentive Plan or country equivalent.

Maximum opportunity

Maximum participation levels for all staff, including Executive Directors, are set by relevant UK legislation or other 
relevant legislation.

Executive Directors will be entitled to participate on those same terms.

Performance measures/assessment 
and recovery provisions

Not applicable.

Minimum shareholding requirements

Element, purpose and link to strategy

To ensure that Executive Directors’ interests are aligned with those of shareholders over a longer time horizon.

Operation

The Executive Directors are required to build or maintain (as relevant) a minimum shareholding in the Company.
Shares included in this calculation are those held beneficially by the Executive Director and their spouse/life partner. 
This includes vested LTIP shares subject to the two year post-vesting holding period but does not include any 
potential deferred bonus shares.

Minimum requirement

The shareholding requirement is 250% of salary for Executive Directors to be built up over five years.

Performance measures/assessment 
and recovery provisions

Not applicable.

Legacy awards 
The Committee reserves the right to honour any remuneration payments or awards to Executive Directors, notwithstanding that they are 
not in line with the Policy set out above where the terms of the payment or award were agreed before the Policy came into effect. Such 
payments or awards will be set out in the Annual Report on Remuneration for the relevant year. 

Performance measures and targets 
The table below sets out the rationale for performance measures chosen in respect of the Annual Bonus and LTIP:

Element

Performance measures

Rationale

How targets are set

Annual bonus

A range of financial and non-financial 
performance measures.

The Committee selected the financial 
measures based on the Group’s Key 
Performance Indicators (KPIs) and personal 
objectives are individually set and based on 
key strategic goals.

The performance targets are determined 
annually by the Committee taking into 
account market conditions and forecasts.

LTIP

•  EPS
•  Relative Total Shareholder Return

EPS is an important measure of 
shareholder value over which Executive 
Directors have clear line of sight.

EPS targets are set in reference to business 
plans and take into account shareholder 
expectations. 

Relative Total Shareholder Return reflects 
DFS performance relative to other 
companies in which investors could choose 
to invest.

Relative Total Shareholder Return targets 
are determined taking into account the 
comparative market returns and the 
expected level of returns for DFS 
shareholders.

The Committee is of the opinion that, given the commercial sensitivity of the Company’s operations, disclosing precise targets for the 
Annual Bonus in advance would not be in shareholders’ interests. Except in circumstances where elements remain commercially 
sensitive, actual targets, performance achieved and awards made will be published at the end of the performance periods so 
shareholders can fully assess the basis for any payouts.

Discretion with the Directors’ Remuneration Policy 
The Committee has discretion in several areas of Policy as set out in this report. The Committee may also exercise operational and 
administrative discretions under relevant plan rules approved by shareholders as set out in those rules. In addition, the Committee has 
the discretion to amend Policy with regard to minor or administrative matters where it would be, in the opinion of the Committee, 
disproportionate to seek or await shareholder approval. 

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018Directors’ remuneration report continued69

Illustrations of application of Policy
The charts below seek to demonstrate how pay varies with performance for the Executive Directors based on the stated remuneration 
Policy. The charts show an estimate of the remuneration that could be received by Executives Directors under the Policy set out in this 
report. Each of the bars is broken down to show how the total under each scenario is made up of fixed elements of remuneration, the 
annual bonus and the LTIP. The charts indicate that a significant proportion of both target and maximum pay is performance related. In 
line with changes to the Directors’ Remuneration Reporting Regulations, scenarios including share price growth of 50% over the period 
of the Policy are shown. A scenario chart for Ian Filby, the outgoing CEO, is not shown. 

£1,800,000

£1,500,000

£1,200,000

£900,000

£1,775,000

£1,475,000

£1,215,000

£1,035,000

£600,000

£475,000

£300,000

£0

Minimum

On-target

Maximum

Maximum
(with equity
growth at
50% over
3 years)

On-target
(with equity
growth at
50% over 
3 years)

Tim Stacey

£1,193,000

£1,013,000

£719,000

£827,000

£353,000

Minimum

On-target

Maximum

Maximum
(with equity
growth at
50% over
3 years)

On-target
(with equity
growth at
50% over 
3 years)

Nicola Bancroft

Fixed

Annual Bonus

LTIP

Equity growth on LTIP shares

Assumptions used in determining the level of pay-out under given scenarios are as follows:

Element

Fixed elements

Annual bonus

LTIP

Minimum

On-Target

Maximum

•  Base salary of £400,000 for Tim Stacey and £300,000 for Nicola Bancroft.
•  Pension £50,000 for Tim Stacey and £40,000 for Nicola Bancroft. 
•  Estimated value of benefits provided under the Policy in line with  

2017 figures for CEO and CFO role.

Nil

Nil

50% of maximum

60% of maximum

100% of salary for both Executive 
Directors

Tim Stacey: 150% of salary
Nicola Bancroft: 120% of salary

Notes
1.  For both the Annual Bonus and LTIP on-target assumptions, the mid-point between threshold and maximum has been selected. 
2.  For the Annual Bonus, the Policy allows for award levels to increase up to 120% of salary, however, the current levels remain at 100% of salary. 

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 201870

Approach to recruitment and promotions
The Company will pay total remuneration for new Executive Directors that enables the Company to attract appropriately skilled and 
experienced individuals, but is not, in the opinion of the Committee, excessive. The remuneration package for any new recruit would be 
assessed following the same principles as for the Executive Directors, as set out in the remuneration Policy table.

For a new Executive Director who is an internal appointment, the Company may also continue to honour contractual commitments made 
prior to the internal appointment even if those commitments are otherwise inconsistent with the Policy in force when the commitments 
are satisfied. Any relevant incentive plan participation may either continue on its original terms or the performance targets and/or 
measures may be amended to reflect the individual’s new role, as the Committee considers appropriate. 

Under the new Policy, the Committee is proposing to reduce the maximum annual variable remuneration to 350% of salary from 450%  
of salary previously. This recognises the fact that it is important to exercise restraint in relation to quantum. The Committee felt that 
reducing the maximum variable remuneration to 350% was appropriate but still allowed for competitive award levels.

The table below summarises our key policies with respect to recruitment remuneration:

Element

Policy description

Base salary and benefits

•  The salary level will be set taking into account a number of factors including market factors, the individual’s experience and 

responsibilities and other pay structures within the Company and will be consistent with the salary Policy for existing 
Executive Directors.

•  This may mean that the Executive Director is recruited on a salary below the market rate with a view that it would be 

increased subject to performance over a number of years.

•  Benefits may be provided in line with DFS’ benefits Policy as set out in the remuneration Policy table.

Pension

•  An Executive Director will be able to receive either a contribution to a personal pension scheme or cash allowance in lieu of 

pension benefits in line with DFS’ Policy as set out in the remuneration Policy table.

Annual Bonus

•  An Executive Director will be eligible to participate in the Annual Bonus as set out in the remuneration Policy table.
•  Awards may be granted up to the maximum opportunity allowable in the remuneration Policy table at the Committee’s 

discretion.

LTIP

•  An Executive Director will be eligible to participate in the Long-Term Incentive Plan as set out in the remuneration Policy 

Maximum variable 
remuneration

Share buy-outs/
replacement awards

table.

•  Awards may be granted up to the maximum opportunity allowable under scheme rules at the Committee’s discretion.

•  The maximum annual variable remuneration that an Executive Director can receive may be up to 350% of salary (i.e. 

Annual Bonus and LTIP Awards).

•  The Company may, where appropriate, compensate a new Executive Director for variable or share based remuneration 

that has been forfeited as a result of accepting the appointment with the Company. Where the Company compensates a 
new Executive Director in this way, it will seek to do so under the terms of the Company’s existing variable remuneration 
arrangements, but may compensate on terms that are more bespoke than the existing arrangements where the 
Committee considers that to be appropriate.

•  In such instances, the Company will disclose a full explanation of the detail and rationale for such recruitment related 

compensation. In making such awards the Committee will seek to take into account the nature (including whether awards 
are cash or share-based), vesting period and performance measures and/or conditions for any remuneration forfeited by 
the individual when leaving a previous employer. Where such awards had outstanding performance or service conditions 
(which are not significantly completed) the Company will generally impose equivalent conditions.

•  The value of the buy-out awards will broadly be the equivalent of, or less than, the value of the award being bought out.

Relocation policies

•  In instances where the new Executive is relocated from one work location to another, the Company will provide 

compensation to reflect the cost of relocation for the Executive in cases where they are expected to spend significant time 
away from their home location in accordance with its normal relocation package for employees.

•  The level of the relocation package will be assessed on a case by case basis but will take into consideration any cost of 
living differences; housing allowance; and schooling in accordance with the Company’s normal relocation package for 
employees.

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018Directors’ remuneration report continued71

Executive Director service contracts and payment for loss of office
Service contracts 
When setting notice periods, the Committee has regard to market practice and corporate governance best practice. The table below 
summarises the service contracts for our Executive Directors.

Ian Filby

Tim Stacey 

Nicola Bancroft

Date of contract

Notice period

13 July 2010

21 May 2018

6 months (Executive) or 12 months (Company)

1 August 2016

6 months (Executive) or 6 months (Company)

All service contracts are available for viewing at the Company’s registered office and at the AGM. The Executive Directors may accept 
outside appointments subject to approval of the Board and provided that such appointments do not in any way prejudice their ability to 
perform their duties as Executive Directors of the Company. The Executive Directors concerned may retain fees paid for these services.

Payments for loss of office 
When determining any loss of office payment for a departing director the Committee will always seek to minimise cost to the Company 
whilst complying with the contractual terms and seeking to reflect the circumstances in place at the time. The Committee reserves the 
right to make additional payments where such payments are made in good faith in discharge of an existing legal obligation (or by way of 
damages for breach of such an obligation); or by way of settlement or compromise of any claim arising in connection with the termination 
of an Executive Director’s office or employment. 

The table below sets out, for each element of total remuneration, the Company’s Policy on payment for loss of office in respect of 
Executive Directors and any discretion available:

Element

Approach

Base salary

Annual bonus

The Company is entitled to terminate an Executive Director’s 
employment without notice and without compensation for 
resignation or in the event of termination by the Company due to 
gross misconduct, willful neglect or certain other specified 
circumstances.

In other circumstances the Company may determine that an 
Executive Director will be entitled to receive payment in lieu of 
notice equivalent to the salary payments that he would have been 
entitled to receive during any required period of notice or 
unexpired part thereof.

Where an Executive Director’s employment is terminated after 
the end of a financial year but before the bonus payment is made, 
the Executive Director may be eligible for a bonus award for that 
financial year subject to an assessment based on financial and 
personal performance achieved over the period.

Where an Executive Director’s employment is terminated during a 
financial year, a pro-rata bonus award for the period worked in 
that financial year may be payable subject to an assessment 
based on financial and personal performance.

In respect of Ian Filby (but not part of the Company’s Policy for 
any other Executive Directors), where the Company decides to 
invoke the contractual payment in lieu of notice clause, he will be 
entitled to receive a bonus equivalent to 75% of his maximum 
bonus opportunity based on financial performance, pro-rated for 
any required period of notice or unexpired part thereof. Any such 
payment shall be made promptly following the Board’s approval 
and signing of the audited accounts for the year concerned.

However, there may be no payment in the event of gross 
misconduct, willful neglect or certain other specified 
circumstances

Discretion

None.

In respect of Ian Filby (but not part of the Company’s Policy for 
other Executive Directors) the Committee has discretion to 
increase the payment in respect of any pro-rata bonus by the 
amount of bonus based on personal performance that the 
Committee determines would have been payable had the 
Executive Director’s employment not been terminated.

Further, and for Ian Filby only, where a payment is made in lieu of 
notice, the Committee has discretion to increase the bonus 
payment in respect of financial performance to an amount 
equivalent to 100% of the maximum bonus opportunity. The 
Committee also retains discretion to increase the payment in 
respect of bonus based on personal performance that the 
Committee determines would have been payable had Ian Filby’s 
employment not been terminated.

The Committee confirms that it will explain the reasons should it 
ever have to invoke these discretions.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 201872

Element

Approach

Discretion

Under the rules of the LTIP and the Deferred Annual Bonus Plan 
the Committee has discretion to determine whether the reason 
for termination of employment is “any other reason” (as described 
in the previous column) – such classification effectively governs 
the treatment of awards post-cessation of employment.

Deferred Annual Bonus Plan 
The Committee has the discretion to vest deferred shares at the 
end of the original deferral period or at the date of cessation. The 
Remuneration Committee will make this determination depending 
on the type of “good leaver” reason resulting in the cessation.

LTIP
The Committee has discretion to determine that vesting will take 
place as soon as practicable following the date of cessation.
The Committee has discretion to determine whether or not 
vesting of an award shall be reduced on a pro rata basis to take 
account of the extent to which any performance conditions have 
been satisfied and the period of time that has elapsed from the 
grant date to the date of cessation.

General 
It should be noted that it is the Committee’s Policy only to apply 
its discretion if the circumstances at the time are, in its opinion, 
sufficiently exceptional, and to provide a full explanation to 
shareholders where discretion is exercised.

Deferred Annual 
Bonus Plan and 
LTIP – cessation of 
employment 

Set out below is a summary of the treatment of awards under the 
Deferred Annual Bonus Plan and LTIP for “good leavers”. A 
participant is a “good leaver” if a participant ceases employment 
as a result of:
•  death;
•  ill-health, injury or disability;
•  the participant’s employing company ceasing to be a Group 

member or the transfer of an undertaking or part of an 
undertaking (in which the participant is employed) to a person 
who is not a Group member; or

•  other reason, permitted by the Committee in its absolute 
discretion except where the participant is summarily 
dismissed.

Deferred Annual Bonus Plan
Unless the Committee determines otherwise, all subsisting 
deferred share awards will continue and vest on the normal 
vesting date. 

If a participant in the Deferred Annual Bonus Plan ceases 
employment for any other reason, his awards will lapse in full on 
the date of such cessation.

The Committee has discretion to determine whether to pro-rate 
the maximum number of shares to the time from the date of grant 
to the date of cessation. The Remuneration Committee’s normal 
policy is that it will not pro-rate awards for time. The 
Remuneration Committee will determine whether or not to 
pro-rate based on the circumstances of the Executive Directors’ 
departure.

LTIP
Unless the Committee determines that an LTIP Award will vest as 
soon as practicable after the date of cessation, an LTIP Award 
which has not yet vested as at the date of cessation will continue 
and vest on the normal vesting date subject to earlier vesting on 
certain corporate events taking place.

If a participant in the LTIP ceases employment for any other 
reason, his awards will lapse in full (whether vested or not) on the 
date of such cessation.

Unless otherwise determined by the Committee in its absolute 
discretion the number of shares in respect of which an award 
shall vest will be calculated on a pro rata basis, taking into 
account the extent to which any performance conditions have 
been satisfied at the end of the performance period (or at the 
date of cessation, if vesting following cessation is permitted) and 
the period of time that has elapsed from the grant date to the 
date of cessation.

Unless otherwise determined by the Committee and except in 
the event of the participant’s death, any applicable post-vesting 
holding period will continue to apply post cessation of 
employment.

General 
All vested LTIP Awards or Deferred Annual Bonus Awards in the 
form of nil-cost options may be exercised following cessation for 
such period as set out in the relevant rules or otherwise 
determined by the Committee.

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018Directors’ remuneration report continued73

Element

Approach

Discretion

Deferred Annual 
Bonus Plan and 
LTIP – change of 
control 

In the event of a takeover or scheme of arrangement awards will 
automatically vest on the date of such event (subject to provisions 
in the LTIP and Annual Bonus Deferred Plan rules which allow for 
exchanges of awards). On a voluntary/compulsory winding-up of 
the Company (other than in the nature of an internal re-
organisation), demerger or other events deemed appropriate by 
the Committee awards will vest at the discretion of the 
Committee on the date of such event.

Deferred Annual Bonus Plan 
Unless otherwise determined by the Board, subsisting Deferred 
Annual Bonus Awards will vest in full. To the extent awards do not 
vest or are exchanged (in case of a takeover or scheme of 
arrangement only) they shall lapse in full immediately.

LTIP 
Unless otherwise determined by the Board, the number of shares 
in respect of which an award shall vest will be calculated on a 
pro-rata basis taking into account the extent any performance 
conditions have been satisfied at the date of the relevant event 
and the period of time that has elapsed from the grant date to the 
date of the relevant event. To the extent awards do not vest or are 
exchanged (in the case of a takeover or scheme of arrangement 
only) they shall lapse in full immediately. On a change of control, 
the post-vesting holding period will not apply. 

The Committee has discretion to determine that awards vest on a 
date prior to the date of the corporate event taking place.

Deferred Annual Bonus Plan
The Committee has discretion regarding whether to pro-rate the 
award to time. The Committee’s normal policy is that it will not 
pro-rate awards for time. The Committee will make this 
determination depending on the circumstances of the change of 
control.

LTIP
The Committee has discretion to determine whether or not 
vesting of an award shall be reduced on a pro rata basis to take 
account of the extent to which any performance conditions have 
been satisfied and the period of time that has elapsed from the 
grant date to the date of the relevant event.

General
It should be noted that it is the Committee’s Policy only to apply 
its discretion if the circumstances at the time are, in its opinion, 
sufficiently exceptional, and to provide a full explanation to 
shareholders where discretion is exercised.

The Committee has discretion for existing unvested awards to be 
exchanged in the event of a takeover.

Consideration of employee remuneration and shareholders
Consideration of shareholder views 
The Committee takes the views of the shareholders seriously and these views are taken into account in shaping the Policy and practice. 
Shareholder views are considered when evaluating and setting remuneration strategy and the Committee welcomes an open dialogue 
with its shareholders on all aspects of remuneration. The Committee consulted its major shareholders (over 50% of shareholders based 
on Issued Share Capital) and the main shareholder representative bodies (IA, ISS and Glass Lewis) on the proposed new Remuneration 
Policy for which we are seeking shareholder approval at the 2018 AGM. The Committee is grateful for the time that shareholders have 
taken to consider proposals and provide feedback. At the end of the consultation a large majority of shareholders consulted indicated 
they were supportive of the proposed new Remuneration Policy. 

The Committee will continue to maintain an open and constructive dialogue with its major shareholders and the representative bodies 
and where appropriate, will always seek to consult. 

Consideration of employee views and employment conditions elsewhere in the Group
In setting the Policy for directors, the pay and conditions of other employees of DFS are taken into account, including any base salary 
increases awarded. The Committee is provided with data on the remuneration structure for management level tiers below the Executive 
Directors, and uses this information to ensure consistency and fairness of approach throughout the Company.

Formal consultation on the remuneration of Executive Directors is not undertaken with employees. However, currently a survey on 
employee engagement is undertaken annually and includes discussion on parts of the Group’s remuneration approach. The Committee 
is looking at ways that practice in this area can evolve. 

The Policy described above applies specifically to Executive Directors of the Company. The Committee believes that the structure of 
management and employee reward at DFS should be linked to DFS’s strategy and performance. The table below illustrates how the 
remuneration framework operates below the Executive Directors:

Level

Senior management

Head of divisions and  
or functions

Managers

All employees

Employee  
numbers

Fixed  
remuneration

Annual bonus  
or incentive/ 
commission plans

Restricted  
share plan

Long-term 
incentive plan

All employee 
HMRC plans

Shareholding 
guidelines

9

c.35

c.180

5000+

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 201874

Non-Executive Director remuneration Policy and letters of appointment
Remuneration Policy table 
The Chairman and the Executive Directors of the Board are responsible for setting the remuneration of the Non-Executive Directors, 
other than the Chairman whose remuneration is determined by the Committee and recommended to the Board.

The table below sets out the key elements of the Policy for Non-Executive Directors:

Purpose

Operation

To provide 
compensation 
that attracts 
high calibre 
individuals and 
reflects their 
experience 
and knowledge

Fee levels are reviewed periodically taking into account independent advice and 
the time commitment required of Non-Executive Directors.

The fees paid to the Chairman and the fees of the other Non-Executive 
Directors aim to be competitive with other fully listed companies which the 
Committee (in the case of the Chairman) and the Board (in respect of the 
Non-Executive Directors) consider to be of equivalent size and complexity.

Maximum opportunity

Any increase in Non-Executive 
Director fees may be above the level 
awarded to other employees, given 
that they may only be reviewed 
periodically and may need to reflect 
any changes to time commitments 
or responsibilities.

Non-Executive Directors may receive a base fee and additional fees for the role 
of Senior Independent Director or membership and/or Chairmanship of certain 
committees.

The Company will pay reasonable 
expenses incurred by the Chairman 
and Non-Executive Directors.

Performance 
measures and 
assessment

Non-Executive 
Director fees are 
not performance 
related.

Non-Executive Directors also receive reimbursement of reasonable expenses 
(and any tax thereon) incurred undertaking their duties and or Company 
business.

Non-Executive Directors do not receive any variable remuneration element.

Non-Executive Directors are entitled to staff discount on Group merchandise on 
the same basis as other employees, and may also receive seasonal gifts.

The Company’s policy when setting fees for the appointment of new Non-Executive Directors is to apply the Policy which applies to 
current Non-Executive Directors. 

Letters of appointment 
The Non-Executive Directors do not have service contracts but are appointed under letters of appointment which provide for a review 
after an initial three year term terminable by either the Non-Executive Director or the Company with one month’s prior written notice. 
Each Non-Executive Director is subject to annual re-election at the Company’s AGM. The table below sets out the dates that each 
Non-Executive Director was first appointed as a Group Director.

Ian Durant
Alison Hutchinson
Luke Mayhew

Julie Southern

Date of appointment

2 May 2017
1 May 2018
1 October 2014

2 February 2015

No compensation is payable in the event of early termination apart from the notice period. All letters of appointment are available for 
viewing at the Company’s registered office and at the AGM.

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018Directors’ remuneration report continued75

PART D: 2018 ANNUAL REPORT ON REMUNERATION

This 2018 Annual Report on Remuneration contains details of how the Company’s Policy for Directors was implemented during the 
Financial Year ended 28 July 2018. The Policy was approved by shareholders at the 2015 AGM on 4 December 2015 and we are seeking 
approval for the revised Policy at the 2018 AGM. A copy of the proposed Policy can be found on pages 65 to 74 of this Remuneration 
Report. 

This report has been prepared in accordance with Schedule 8 to the Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and 
Reports) Regulations 2008 as amended in 2013, the provisions of the current Code and the Listing Rules. An advisory resolution to 
approve this report, the Annual Statement and the revised Policy will be put to shareholders at the AGM on 30 November 2018.

1. Executive Director Remuneration
Single figure remuneration table – audited
The remuneration of Executive Directors showing the breakdown between components with comparative figures for the prior financial 
year is shown below. Figures provided have been calculated in accordance with the Regulations.

Ian Filby

Nicola Bancroft

Base salary 
£’000

Taxable 
benefits1 
£’000

Bonus 
£’000

Long-term 
incentives 
£’000

Pension 
£’000

Other 
£’000

2018

2017

2018

2017

439

430

272

240

26

25

17

13

158

161

95

91

—

—

—

—

50

502

35

35

—

—

10

93

Total 
£’000

673

666

429

388

Notes
1.  Taxable benefits comprise car and fuel allowance, private medical insurance (including cover for spouses and dependents), relevant professional subscriptions, seasonal 

gifts and reimbursement of home telephone line and telephone expenses – the value of which has been included in the Taxable Benefits column.
Ian Filby waived his entitlement to a pension contribution from the Group and a charitable donation of £50,000 (2017: £50,000) has been made as an alternative.

2. 
3.  Nicola Bancroft opted for a company car of lower value and received an allowance for the difference.

Annual bonus outcomes for the Financial Year ending 28 July 2018 – audited
For 2018 the CEO and the CFO had a maximum annual bonus opportunity of 100% of salary. For each Executive Director, the 2018 
annual bonus determination was based on performance against five performance measures namely: Group revenue, Group underlying 
profit before tax (“PBT”), Group underlying cash flow, Net Promoter Score and personal objectives. Group revenue has been selected as 
a performance measure rather than Group gross sales as disclosed in the FY17 Remuneration Report in order to improve alignment with 
statutory financial measures. In the current environment of stable VAT and interest rates the two measures are aligned: in FY18 both 
gross sales and revenue for the pre-acquisition Group decreased by 2.0%

The table below provides information on the targets for each measure, actual performance and resulting bonus payment for each 
Executive Director. Performance targets and actual performance are based on the pre-acquisition Group, excluding Sofology:

Threshold 
performance 
target (0% of 
performance 
measure 
maximum 
opportunity 
earned)

739.0

49.1

33.8

34.2%

Weighting  
(% of maximum 
bonus 
opportunity)

20%

20%

20%

20%

20%

Maximum 
performance target 
(100% of 
performance 
measure maximum 
opportunity earned)

Actual 
performance 
outcome

% of performance 
measure 
maximum  

opportunity earned

774.0

£747.7m

24.9%

54.8

38.0

36.8%

£38.4m

£32.3m

35.8%

0%

0%

61.5%

Target level of 
performance

761.7

52.8

36.5

36.1%

See below

See below

93.8%/87.5%

Ian Filby
Nicola Bancroft

36.0%
34.8%

Performance measure

Group revenue (£m)

Group underlying PBT (£m)

Group underlying cash flow (£m)

Net Promotor Score

Personal objectives - IF/NB

Overall extent to which the bonus 
targets were achieved

Notes
1.  Between threshold, target and maximum, pay-out for the measures was calculated on a straight-line basis.
2.  Revenue and underlying PBT are presented on the income statement on page 90. Underlying cash flow means the net movement in cash and cash equivalents during the 

Financial Year as adjusted for cash flows associated with non-underlying items.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 2018 
76

Performance against the personal objectives and the Committee’s assessment of performance for both Executive Directors is set out in 
the table below. As part of its assessment, the Committee also took into account Group health and safety objectives to ensure that a 
safe environment was in place for all employees and customers. The Committee was satisfied that timely reporting of health and safety 
and risk mitigation activities had been undertaken throughout the year with no major instances. 

Each of the objectives have specific measures and targets. There are some measures where we have not disclosed detailed 
performance against objectives as the targets themselves are commercially sensitive and to disclose specific figures would not be in the 
best interests of the Group and our shareholders. 

Director

Ian Filby

Personal objectives set at the start of the year

Assessment against targets

Property strategy: Prepare a 5 year plan on optimising the 
Property Portfolio

Senior leadership development: Demonstrably invest to 
develop the Senior Team

•  Development of the Group property strategy and 

sign-off by the Board 

•  Positive feedback from investors on Capital 

Markets Day

•  All personal development plans are in place for the 

senior executive team

•  Successful development of processes to achieve a 

smooth transition to future successor 

Online progress: Drive e-commerce and m-commerce 
revenues and online experience for customers

•  Increase in e-commerce and m-commerce 

revenues

Integration of Customer Acquisition with Brand Portfolio: 
Provide a strategy for the future acquisition of customers and 
how they will be prioritised to our brand portfolio

Nicola Bancroft Cash management: Lead the implementation of initiatives to 

deliver an incremental material cash improvement

•  Significant work undertaken on the assessment of 

the Group’s brand portfolio

•  Leading presentations to the Group Board on 

brand positioning and developing action plans for 
each brand 

•  Management of daily and weekly cash flow 
•  Minimisation of interest charges
•  Generating savings from the implementation of 

cash improvement initiatives 

Outcome

Fully 
achieved

Fully 
achieved

Fully 
achieved 

Partially 
achieved 

Partially 
achieved 

Sofology Acquisition: Effective management of the regulatory 
matters clearance and integration process in accordance with 
the agreed milestone plan

4 Year Planning and Strategic KPIs: Facilitate a high quality 
strategy dialogue process with the Group Board to reach 
agreement on a revised 4 year plan, including explicit 
agreement on strategic KPIs

External Stakeholder relationships: Complete successfully 
full year and half year reporting and relevant regulatory 
requirements and external communications

•  Acquisition completed after sign off at phase 1
•  Delivering in line with the agreed milestone plan

Fully 
achieved

•  Delivering successful presentation at the Board 

strategy day leading to the agreement of the 4 year 
plan and strategic KPIs

Fully 
achieved

•  Ongoing management of calls with banks, analysts 

and investors measured through satisfactory 
investor reaction and feedback

•  Banks signed up to change in year-end timetable

Fully 
achieved

As a result of the performance results shown above, the bonuses awarded to the Executive Directors are £157,933 for Ian Filby (36.0% of 
maximum) and £94,517 for Nicola Bancroft (34.8% of maximum). The 2018 bonuses for Ian Filby and Nicola Bancroft will be paid in cash. 
No part of the bonus will be subject to deferral and no discretion was exercised by the Committee when determining the bonus 
outcomes.

LTIP vesting for the year ended 28 July 2018 – audited
The 2016 award was granted in October 2015 and was assessed against the performance targets at the end of FY18. The final level of 
vesting of these awards was nil as set out in the table below.

Performance measure

Earnings per share

TSR vs FTSE 250  
(ex. Investment Trusts)

Total

Weighting

 (% of maximum 
bonus opportunity)

Threshold  
performance target

Maximum  
performance target

 (20% of 
performance 
measure maximum 
opportunity earned)

 (100% of 
performance 
measure maximum 
opportunity earned)

Actual performance 
outcome

% of performance 
measure maximum 
opportunity earned

50%

50%

100%

8%
(23.3p)

18%
(30.4p)

8.9%
(14.0p)

Equal to Index 
performance

Index 
performance 
+ 12% p.a.

13% p.a.  
below Index 
performance

n/a

0%

0%

0%

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018Directors’ remuneration report continued77

Defined benefit pension
The Executive Directors do not have a prospective right to a defined benefit pension by reference to qualifying service.

Payments to past Directors or for loss of office – audited
There have been no payments to past Directors or payments for loss of office during the 2018 financial year. However, as announced on 
22 May 2018, Ian Filby will be stepping down as CEO effective 31 October 2018. As a result, the leaving arrangements for Ian will be 
disclosed in full on the corporate website at that time and in next year’s Directors’ Remuneration Report. Ian will continue to provide the 
Group with his extensive business experience and expertise including by taking on the role of part-time Chairman of Sofology and driving 
the continued integration of Sofology and DFS’ businesses. All arrangements with Ian Filby are within the framework of the approved 
Remuneration Policy.

2. Implementation of remuneration Policy for the Executive Directors for 2019
Base salary
In setting salary levels for the 2019 Financial Year for the Executive Directors, the Committee considered a number of factors, including 
individual performance and experience, pay and conditions for employees across the Group, the general performance of the Company, 
pay levels in other comparable companies and the economic environment. The salaries for 2018 and the relative increases are set out 
below. Details regarding the Committee’s decision on Nicola Bancroft’s salary for 2019 are set out on page 60. 

Ian Filby 
Tim Stacey
Nicola Bancroft

Base salary p.a. £

2019

2018

% change

449,670
400,000
300,000

438,702
N/A
271,600

+2.5%
N/A
+10.5%

Notes
1.  Tim Stacey was not an Executive Director in the 2018 Financial Year and therefore, his 2018 base salary and percentage change is not shown.
2.  Nicola Bancroft’s 2018 salary is based on Nicola’s salary at the start of the 2018 Financial Year and takes into account the increase to £300,000 p.a. effective 1 February 2018. 

Pension and benefits
The maximum contribution to a personal pension scheme or cash in lieu will continue to be capped at £50,000 for Tim Stacey and 
£40,000 (less employers NI cost) for Nicola Bancroft.

Benefits will be provided to the Executive Directors in line with the Policy.

Annual bonus

Ian Filby
Tim Stacey
Nicola Bancroft

Threshold bonus

Maximum bonus

0% of salary
0% of salary
0% of salary

100% of salary
100% of salary
100% of salary

For FY19, performance measures comprise: Group revenue (15%), Group underlying profit before tax (25%), Group underlying cash flow 
(20%), growth in Established Customer Net Promoter Score (20%) and personal objectives (20%).

The Committee is of the opinion that the precise financial and personal performance targets for the annual bonus are commercially 
sensitive and that it would be detrimental to the interests of the Company to disclose them before the start of the financial year. Actual 
targets, performance achieved and awards made will be published at the end of the performance period so shareholders can fully 
assess the basis for any pay-outs. 

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 201878

LTIP Awards
Details of the LTIP Awards to be made in FY19 are provided below. Due to his retirement, Ian Filby will not receive an LTIP award for FY19. 

Tim Stacey
Nicola Bancroft

Type of award

Maximum value of
award at grant date

Vesting period

Exercise price

Conditional Share Award
Conditional Share Award

150% of salary
120% of salary

Three years
Three years

Nil
Nil

The awards will vest subject to achieving two challenging measures, namely Adjusted EPS1 (50% weighting) and Relative Total 
Shareholder Return2 (50% weighting). Awards will also be subject to a two-year holding period. 

As set out on page 82, we will be retaining relative TSR and EPS growth in the LTIP (each measure will continued to be weighted at 50%). 
The Committee has reviewed the comparator groups within the TSR measure and discussed this specifically with shareholders. We have 
decided that looking ahead over the next three years the UK retail sector is the most relevant group. Therefore, for the 2018 LTIP award, 
the split between the FTSE 350 General Retailers Index and the FTSE 250 Index (excluding Investment Trusts) will be 35:15 (50% of total 
LTIP award). 

We have not yet set EPS growth targets for the 2018 LTIP awards because the new CEO and the Board of Directors are in the process of 
reviewing our long-term business plan. Accordingly, the 2018 LTIP grants will be delayed this year, and in accordance with the Market 
Abuse Regulation rules, we will disclose TSR and EPS performance targets when we grant the LTIP awards in November 2018. 

Notes
1.  Adjusted earnings per share will be calculated on a compound annual growth basis.
2.  Growth in Total Shareholder Return will be calculated on a simple average annual growth rate and split evenly between the two peer group indices.

3. Consideration by the Committee of matters relating to Directors’ remuneration for 2018
The Committee complies with the UK Corporate Governance Code. The Committee makes recommendations to the Board, within 
agreed terms of reference, on remuneration for the Executive Directors and Chair of the Board and has oversight of remuneration 
arrangements for senior management. The Committee’s full terms of reference are available on the Company’s website at www.
dfscorporate.co.uk.

Members of the Committee during 2018 were:
•  Gwyn Burr (Chair – stepped down 30 April)
•  Luke Mayhew (Interim Chair from 1 May)
•  Alison Hutchinson (appointed to the Board on 1 May 2018)
•  Julie Southern

Further details regarding members of the Committee and their attendance at meetings during the course of the year are available on 
page 47 of this Annual Report.

None of the Committee members has any personal financial interest (other than as shareholders) in the decisions made by the 
Committee, conflicts of interests arising from cross-directorships or day-to-day involvement in running the business. The Chair, the CEO 
and the CFO attend meetings at the invitation of the Committee, but are not present when their own remuneration is being discussed. 
The Committee is supported by the Chief People Officer, Finance and Company Secretariat functions.

During the year, there were five Committee meetings. One of the meetings was specifically called to approve CEO succession 
arrangements in light of Ian Filby’s retirement and his replacement in Tim Stacey. In addition to this, the other main item of concern for 
the Committee during the year was the review of the Directors’ Remuneration Policy. The matters covered at the other four meetings are 
covered in the table below. 

September 2017 

January 2018

June 2018

July 2018

•  Salary review for Executive Board 

members

•  2017 bonus scorecard assessment
•  Approving the 2018 bonus scorecard
•  Approving the 2018 LTIP Awards
•  Approving the 2017 Directors’ 

Remuneration Report

•  Gender pay reporting 
•  Market practice and 

corporate governance 
update

•  Approach to Review of 

Directors’ Remuneration 
Policy

•  Review of Directors’ 
Remuneration Policy
Initial discussions on the 2018 
Director’ Remuneration Report

• 

•  Proposal for revisions of 
Directors’ Remuneration 
Policy

•  Consultation with 

•  Annual bonus and in-flight 
LTIP performance updates

shareholders on the 
review of Policy

•  Update on corporate 

•  Performance measures 

•  LTIP vesting calculation review for 

•  CFO salary review

IPO award 

governance, 2018 AGM 
season and market trends

for the LTIP

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018Directors’ remuneration report continued79

The Committee received external advice in 2018 from PwC during the year. The Committee appointed PwC as its advisers after a tender 
process in July 2015. PwC are considered by the Committee to be objective and independent. PwC are members of the Remuneration 
Consultants Group and, as such, voluntarily operate under the code of conduct in relation to executive remuneration consulting in the UK.

The Committee reviewed the nature of all the services provided during the year by PwC and was satisfied that no conflict of interest 
exists or existed in the provision of these services. The total fees paid to PwC in respect of services to the Committee during the year 
were £124,000. Fees were determined based on the scope and nature of the projects undertaken for the Committee.

4. Chief Executive Officer and employee pay
Total Shareholder Returns and Chief Executive Officer pay since IPO
The Committee believes that the current Executive Director Policy and the supporting reward structure provide clear alignment with the 
Company’s performance. The Committee believes it is appropriate to monitor the Company’s performance against the FTSE 250 Index and 
the FTSE 350 General Retailers Index as these both represent the broad equity markets against which the Company compares itself. 

The chart below illustrates our Total Shareholder Return performance against the FTSE 250 Index and FTSE 350 General Retailers Index 
since 5 March 2015, the date of IPO, to the end of FY18, being 28 July 2018.

DFS Furniture plc

FTSE 250 Index

FTSE 350 General Retailers Index

R
S
T
d
e
s
a
b
e
R

140

120

100

80

60

Mar 2015

Jul 2015

Nov 2015

Mar 2016

Jul 2016

Nov 2016

Mar 2017

Jul 2017

Nov 2017

Mar 2018

Jul 2018

Chief Executive Officer

Single figure of total remuneration (£’000)
Bonus pay-out (% maximum)
Long-term incentive vesting rates (% maximum)

2018

2017

2016

2015

673
36.0%
0%

666
37.5%
0%

804
71.9%
n/a

790
85.2%
n/a

Percentage change in the Chief Executive Officer’s remuneration
The table below compares the percentage increase in the Chief Executive Officer’s pay with the wider employee population. The 
Company considers DFS employees other than those whose remuneration includes piecework or commission, and excluding the 
Executive Directors, to be an appropriate comparator group.

% change from FY17 to FY18

Chief Executive Officer (Ian Filby)
Employee pay

Base salary

Benefits

+2.0%
+2.0%

3.7%
n/a

Annual 
bonus

-1.8%
-5.4%

The change in the Chief Executive Officer’s base salary was in line with the general employee award. The smaller change in the annual 
bonus of the Chief Executive in FY18 compared to employees reflects the smaller percentage decrease in employee bonus in FY17.

Relative importance of spend on pay
The table below sets out the overall spend on pay for all employees compared with the returns distributed to shareholders.

Significant distributions

2018

2017

% change

Employee spend2
Distributions to shareholders (ordinary dividends and purchase of own shares)
Distributions to shareholders (special dividends)

Notes
1.  The above figures are taken from notes 4 and 20 to the financial statements.
2.  Employee spend includes salary costs at acquired businesses.

£156.3m £141.6m +10.4%
0%
–

£23.7m £23.7m
£20.1m

–

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 2018 
80

5. Pay fairness throughout the Group 
Wider workforce views and the employee value proposition 
In setting the remuneration Policy for Directors, the pay and conditions of other employees of DFS are taken into account, including any 
base salary increases awarded. The Committee is provided with data on the remuneration structure for management level tiers below 
the Executive Directors, and uses this information to ensure consistency and fairness of approach throughout the Company.

Formal consultation on the remuneration of Executive Directors is not undertaken with employees. However, a survey on employee 
engagement is undertaken annually and includes discussion on parts of the Group’s remuneration approach. 

As part of our commitment to fairness, we have set out further information on our employee offering. The various factors which make up 
our “Fair Deal” proposition is below. The Remuneration Policy on page 73 also sets out how we cascade our remuneration framework 
throughout the organisation. 

Area 

Detail

Pay and benefits

•  We aim to be the market median payer of remuneration for good individual performance, believing that this 

approach balances fairness to the employee as well as responsible use of shareholders funds. 

•  Employees can share in our success via bonus schemes and the SAYE. 

Working environment

•  We strive to create a positive working environment and promote the right behaviours through evidence of objective 

decision making, equity of treatment and trust in doing the right things in the right way 

Development opportunities

•  We provided access to development opportunities enabling growth within function or cross functionally 

Recognition

•  We provide monetary and non-monetary recognition
•  We have visible celebrations of achievements
•  We have opportunities for peer led and hierarchical recognition

Gender pay gap reporting and diversity 
Gender pay reporting legislation which came into force in April 2017 requires all UK employers with 250 or more employees to publish 
annual information illustrating pay differences between male and female employees. Fairness and diversity are very important to DFS and 
we are committed to ensuring that all our employees have the opportunity to thrive and prosper and so we welcome the legislation. The 
Group is confident our male and female employees receive equal pay for equivalent jobs. We published our Gender Pay Gay Reporting 
in February 2018 and it is available online: http://www.dfscorporate.co.uk/media/40041/DFS-Gender-Pay-Gap-Feb-2018.pdf 

We recognise that there is a gender pay gap in the business. DFS' employee base has a two-thirds male, one-third female split driven mainly by 
the fact that historically our manufacturing, supply chain and retail business areas have, for various reasons, attracted a male bias workforce. 
Our analysis shows that our 19% mean and 14% median pay gap is a result of more men in senior positions throughout all business areas.

The Company is committed to addressing the gender pay gap. The Company’s recently formed Diversity Steering Committee – led by 
senior members of our executive board – is committed to helping close the gap. Whilst the Diversity Steering Committee looks at all 
aspects of diversity within the business, its primary focus currently is to seek to understand potential barriers to attracting female talent 
into specific areas of our business, while ensuring women feel inspired and enabled to reach their full potential at DFS and are 
encouraged to take up senior leadership positions. The Board is kept aware of progress and initiatives in this area. In addition, we have 
also introduced a number of broader initiatives relating to flexible working, recruitment and promoting cultural change.

6. Non-Executive Director remuneration
Single figure remuneration table – audited
The remuneration of Non-Executive Directors showing the breakdown between components, with comparative figures for the prior year, 
is shown below. Figures provided have been calculated in accordance with the Regulations.

Director

Ian Durant1

Luke Mayhew

Gwyn Burr2

Julie Southern

Alison Hutchinson3

Notes
1. 
Ian Durant was appointed to the Board on 2 May 2017
2.  Gwyn Burr stepped down from the Board on 30 April 2018 
3.  Alison Hutchinson was appointed to the Board on 1 May 2018 

Fees
£’000

180

45

60

60

42

50

56

50

13

0

Other
£’000

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Total
£’000

180

45

60

60

42

50

56

50

13

0

2018

2017

2018

2017

2018

2017

2018

2017

2018

2017

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018Directors’ remuneration report continued81

Fees to be provided in FY19 to the Non-Executive Directors
The following table sets out the annual fee rates for the Non-Executive Directors:

Chair fee
Senior Independent Director fee
Chair of Audit/Remuneration Committee fee
Independent Non-Executive Director fee

2019
£

2018
£

% change

180,000
60,000
57,000
50,000

180,000
60,000
57,000
50,000

0%
0%
0%
0%

Fees for the Chair of the Board were set at £180,000 on his appointment in May 2017. For Non-Executive Directors, base fees have not 
changed for FY19. Non-Executive fees will be kept under review for future periods.

7. Directors’ shareholdings and share interests
Shareholding and other interests at 28 July 2018 – audited 
Directors’ share interests and, where applicable, achievement of shareholding requirements are set out below. In order that their interests 
are aligned with those of shareholders, Executive Directors are expected to build up and maintain (as relevant) a personal shareholding 
equal to 200% of their base salary in the Company.

Director

Ian Filby
Nicola Bancroft
Ian Durant
Luke Mayhew
Gwyn Burr
Julie Southern
Alison Hutchinson

Total

Shareholding at 28 July 2018

Interests in shares under the 
LTIP (Conditional shares)

Number of 
beneficially 
owned
shares1

1,313,208
371,352
15,000
44,121
0
3,921
0

1,747,602

% of
salary held2

Shareholding 
requirement 
met

Subject to 
conditions

Vested but 
unexercised

Unvested 
SAYE awards

Total at 
28 July 2018

594%
252%
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a

0

Yes
Yes
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a

548,205
235,311
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a

0

783,516

–
–
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a

0

9,782
–
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a

1,871,195
606,663
15,000
44,121
–
3,921
–

9,782 2,540,900

Notes
1.  Beneficial interests include shares held directly or indirectly by connected persons.
2.  Shareholding requirement calculation is based on the share price at the end of the year (£2.035 at 28 July 2018).

At 1 October 2018 there had been no movement in Directors’ shareholdings and share interests from 28 July 2018.

LTIP awards granted in FY18 – audited
The table below sets out the details of the LTIP Awards granted on 17 November 2017 where vesting will be determined according to the 
achievement of relative TSR and EPS growth performance measures. Non-Executive Directors do not receive LTIP awards.

Director

Type of award

Face value/maximum

value of award  
at grant date
(% of salary)

Number of 
shares

Percentage of award
receivable for threshold
performance

Ian Filby
Conditional Share Award
Nicola Bancroft Conditional Share Award

130% 298,593
100% 128,168

20%
20%

Performance
period end date

Exercise
price

25 July 2020
25 July 2020

Nil
Nil

Notes
1. 
2.  Awards will only vest subject to the achievement of the performance conditions which will be measured at the time the Group publishes its full year financial results.

In line with the Rules of the plan, awards were determined using an average share price prior to grant of £1.90.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 201882

The awards will vest subject to achieving two challenging performance measures, namely Adjusted EPS (50% weighting) and Relative 
Total Shareholder Return (50% weighting). The targets are contained in the table below:

Measure

Weighting

Performance period

Performance target

Adjusted earnings per share growth

50% 3 financial years ending FY20

Total Shareholder Return versus FTSE 250

25% 3 financial years ending FY20

Index (excluding Investment Trusts)

FTSE 350 General Retailers Index

25% 3 financial years ending FY20

Less than 4% per annum

4% per annum

10% per annum

Below Index return

Equal to Index return

10% p.a. above the Index return

Below Index return

Equal to Index return

10% p.a. above the Index return

Vesting
(% of Award)

0%

20%

100%

0%

20%

100%

0%

20%

100%

Notes
1.  Growth in Total Shareholder Return will be calculated on a simple average annual growth rate.
2.  Adjusted earnings per share will be calculated on a compound annual growth basis.

SAYE awards – audited
There were no SAYE awards granted to Executive Directors during the year.

Dilution
The Company intends to fund its share incentives through a combination of new issue and market purchased shares. The Company 
monitors the levels of share grants and the impact of these on the ongoing requirement for shares. In accordance with guidelines set out 
by the Investment Association (“IA”) the Company can issue a maximum of 10% of its issued share capital in a rolling 10-year period to 
employees under all its share plans.

8. Outstanding share awards
The following share awards remain outstanding as at 28 July 2018 (excluding the 2015 LTIP award which lapsed):

Director

Ian Filby

Nicola Bancroft

Type of  
award

Date of  
grant

Number of 
awards

Awards 
vested

Awards 
lapsed

Outstanding 
awards as at  
28 July 2018

Market price 
on date  
of grant

Normal  

vesting date

LTIP 15-Nov-16
16-Nov-17

249,612
298,593

SAYE 07-Dec-16

9,782

LTIP 15-Nov-16
16-Nov-17

107,143
128,168

–
–

–

–
–

–
–

–

–
–

249,612
298,593

224p
191p

15-Nov-19
16-Nov-20

9,782

184p

1-Feb-20

107,143
128,168

224p
191p

15-Nov-19
16-Nov-20

Details of LTIP award performance conditions

LTIP award

2016 LTIP

2017 LTIP

Performance 
conditions

Weighting  
(% award)

Detail

Entry level 
performance

Max 
performance

Threshold 
level vesting

Maximum 
vesting

EPS growth

50%

Reporting underlying EPS

4% p.a.

13% p.a.

Relative TSR

EPS growth

Relative TSR

25%

50%

25% TSR vs FTSE 250 (excluding Financials)

TSR vs FTSE 350 General Retailers

Index

Index

Index + 12%

Index + 12%

Reporting underlying EPS

4% p.a.

10% p.a.

25% TSR vs FTSE 250 (excluding Financials)

25%

TSR vs FTSE 350 General Retailers

Index

Index

Index + 10%

Index + 10%

20% 100%

20% 100%

20% 100%

20% 100%

20% 100%

20% 100%

9. Shareholder voting
The table below shows the binding vote approving the Policy in 2015 and the advisory vote to approve the 2017 Annual Report on 
Remuneration at the AGM in December 2017. 

2015 Directors’ Remuneration Policy
2017 Annual Report on Remuneration

By order of the Board

Luke Mayhew
Interim Chair of the Remuneration Committee
3 October 2018

174,166,632
165,409,850

99.91
99.41

153,151
980,999

Votes for

%

Votes 
against

%

0.09
0.59

Votes 
withheld

0
1,911

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018Directors’ remuneration report continued83

Statement of Directors’ responsibilities in respect of the  
annual report and the financial statements

The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report and 
the Group and parent Company financial statements in 
accordance with applicable law and regulations.

Responsibility statement of the Directors in respect of 
the annual financial report
We confirm that to the best of our knowledge:

Company law requires the Directors to prepare Group and parent 
Company financial statements for each financial year. Under that 
law they are required to prepare the Group financial statements in 
accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards as 
adopted by the European Union (IFRSs as adopted by the EU) and 
applicable law and have elected to prepare the parent Company 
financial statements in accordance with UK accounting standards, 
including FRS 101 Reduced Disclosure Framework.

Under company law the Directors must not approve the financial 
statements unless they are satisfied that they give a true and fair 
view of the state of affairs of the Group and parent Company and 
of their profit or loss for that period. In preparing each of the Group 
and parent Company financial statements, the Directors are 
required to:
•  select suitable accounting policies and then apply them 

•  the financial statements, prepared in accordance with the 

applicable set of accounting standards, give a true and fair view 
of the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit or loss of the 
Company and the undertakings included in the consolidation 
taken as a whole; and

•  the Strategic Report and Directors’ Report includes a fair review 
of the development and performance of the business and the 
position of the issuer and the undertakings included in the 
consolidation taken as a whole, together with a description of 
the principal risks and uncertainties that they face.

We consider the Annual Report and accounts, taken as a whole,  
is fair, balanced and understandable and provides the information 
necessary for shareholders to assess the Group’s position and 
performance, business model and strategy.

consistently;

On behalf of the Board

Ian Filby 
Chief Executive Officer 
3 October 2018 

Nicola Bancroft
Chief Financial Officer

•  make judgements and estimates that are reasonable, relevant, 

• 

• 

reliable and prudent;
for the Group financial statements, state whether they have 
been prepared in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the EU;
for the parent Company financial statements, state whether 
applicable UK accounting standards have been followed, 
subject to any material departures disclosed and explained in 
the parent Company financial statements;

•  assess the Group and parent Company’s ability to continue as a 
going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to 
going concern; and

•  use the going concern basis of accounting unless they either 

intend to liquidate the Group or the parent Company or to cease 
operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so.

The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting 
records that are sufficient to show and explain the parent 
Company’s transactions and disclose with reasonable accuracy at 
any time the financial position of the parent Company and enable 
them to ensure that its financial statements comply with the 
Companies Act 2006. They are responsible for such internal 
control as they determine is necessary to enable the preparation of 
financial statements that are free from material misstatement, 
whether due to fraud or error, and have general responsibility for 
taking such steps as are reasonably open to them to safeguard the 
assets of the Group and to prevent and detect fraud and other 
irregularities.

Under applicable law and regulations, the Directors are also 
responsible for preparing a Strategic Report, Directors’ Report, 
Directors’ Remuneration Report and Corporate Governance 
Statement that complies with that law and those regulations.

The Directors are responsible for the maintenance and integrity of 
the corporate and financial information included on the Company’s 
website. Legislation in the UK governing the preparation and 
dissemination of financial statements may differ from legislation in 
other jurisdictions.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 201884

Independent auditor’s report

Independent auditor’s report to the members of DFS Furniture plc
1. Our opinion is unmodified
We have audited the financial statements of DFS Furniture plc (“the Group”) for the 52 weeks ended 28 July 2018 which comprise  
the Consolidated Income Statement, the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income, the Consolidated Balance Sheet, the 
Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity, the Consolidated Cash Flow Statement, the Company Balance Sheet, the Company 
Statement of Changes in Equity, and the related notes, including the accounting policies in note 1.

In our opinion:
•  the financial statements give a true and fair view of the state of the Group’s and of the parent Company’s affairs as at 28 July 2018 

and of the Group’s profit for the year then ended;

•  the Group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards as 

adopted by the European Union (IFRSs as adopted by the EU);

•  the parent Company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with UK accounting standards, including FRS 

101 Reduced Disclosure Framework; and 

•  the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and, as regards the 

Group financial statements, Article 4 of the IAS Regulation.

Basis for opinion
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (“ISAs (UK)”) and applicable law. Our 
responsibilities are described below. We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is a sufficient and appropriate basis for our 
opinion. Our audit opinion is consistent with our report to the audit committee.

We were first appointed as auditor by the shareholders on 6 July 2015. The period of total uninterrupted engagement is for the 4 financial 
years ended 28 July 2018. We have fulfilled our ethical responsibilities under, and we remain independent of the Group in accordance 
with, UK ethical requirements including the FRC Ethical Standard as applied to listed public interest entities. No non-audit services 
prohibited by that standard were provided.

Overview

Materiality: Group financial statements as a whole

Coverage

Risks of material misstatement

Recurring risks

Event driven

£2.2m (2017: £2.4m)
5.9% (2017: 4.8%) of Group profit before tax excluding non-underlying items

100% (2017: 100%) of Group profit before tax

vs 2017

Recoverability of DFS Trading Limited goodwill 
and of the parent’s investment in subsidiaries

tu

Guarantee Provision

New: Valuation of intangible assets identified 
on acquisition of Sofology

tu

p

2. Key audit matters: our assessment of risks of material misstatement
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgment, were of most significance in the audit of the financial statements 
and include the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) identified by us, including those 
which had the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy; the allocation of resources in the audit; and directing the efforts of the 
engagement team. We summarise below the key audit matters, in decreasing order of audit significance, in arriving at our audit opinion 
above, together with our key audit procedures to address those matters and, as required for public interest entities, our results from 
those procedures. These matters were addressed, and our results are based on procedures undertaken, in the context of, and solely for 
the purpose of, our audit of the financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and consequently are incidental to 
that opinion, and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters.

DFS Annual report & accounts 201885

The risk

Our response

Recoverability of DFS Trading 
Limited goodwill and of the 
parent’s investment in 
subsidiaries

(Group’s goodwill £479.6 million; 
2017: £479.6 million;  
parent Company’s investment  
in subsidiaries £241.5m  
2017: £238.7m).

Forecast-based valuation
There is a risk, particularly in light of 
current political and economic 
uncertainty and more challenging 
market conditions, that the business 
may not meet expected growth 
projections in order to support the 
carrying value of goodwill in relation to 
DFS Trading Limited or the parent 
company’s investment in subsidiaries.

Our procedures included: 
•  Historical comparisons: Analysing the Group’s previous projections 

against actual outcomes to assess the historical reliability of the forecasting. 

•  Benchmarking assumptions: Comparing the Group’s trading forecasts 
against current trading performance and against anticipated growth in the 
furniture retail sector, and investigating any significant deviations, in order to 
challenge the assumptions present within the forecasts. This was 
performed through review of industry projections and using our knowledge 
of DFS Furniture plc and the retail sector.

Refer to page 52 (Audit 
Committee Report), page 98 
(accounting policy) and pages 106 
to 108 (financial disclosures).

This risk remains significant in  
light of recent years of trading 
performance for DFS Trading Limited 
falling behind internal and market 
expectations.

The Group support the goodwill 
balance through a value in use 
calculation that has underlying 
assumptions of varying sensitivities. 
The estimated recoverable amount is 
subjective due to the inherent 
uncertainty involved in forecasting and 
discounting future cash flows.

Guarantee provision

(£6.0 million; 2017: £7.0 million)

Refer to page 52 (Audit 
Committee Report), page 98 
(accounting policy) and page 111 
(financial disclosures).

Subjective estimate
The guarantee provision reflects the 
estimated cost of fulfilling the 
obligations arising from the product 
guarantee provided to retail customers 
of DFS Trading Limited. The amount of 
the provision is inherently uncertain 
and there is significant estimation 
involved in the provision model, 
including assumptions around: average 
cost per claim, volume of claims, and 
the average period over which calls  
are received. 

•  Sensitivity analysis: Performing sensitivity analysis over revenue, profit 
margins, terminal growth rate, and discount factor in order to determine 
their impact on the value in use calculations. 

•  Our sector experience: Engaging our own valuation specialists to assess 
and challenge the discount rate by obtaining the detail of the inputs used in  
the discount rate calculation, benchmarking each input against our own 
expectations, and comparing the overall rate to an expected range based 
on our own benchmarks. 

•  Comparing valuations: Comparing the sum of the discounted cash flows 

for all CGUs to the Group’s market capitalisation to assess the 
reasonableness of those cash flows; and

•  Assessing transparency: Considering the adequacy of the Group’s 
disclosures around the carrying value of goodwill and the impairment 
analysis. 

Our results
•  We found the resulting estimate of the recoverable amount of goodwill in the 
Group and the parent Company’s investment in DFS Trading Limited to be 
acceptable (2017: acceptable).

Our procedures included: 
•  Historical comparisons: Comparing expected volumes of calls against 

historical data.

•  Test of details: Testing key inputs of the calculated cost per call to 

supporting internal documentation and benchmarking to third party costs 
per call.

•  Expectation vs. outcome: Comparing the timing of when items were sold 

to the timing over which calls are expected to arise.

•  Test of details: Assessing the reasonableness of the timing profile of 

service calls by selecting a sample of calls and vouching the original sales 
date to which the call relates to delivery data.

•  Methodology evaluation: Assessing the reasonableness of Group’s 

forecasting methodology by comparing prior period’s provision recognised in 
respect of sales incurred during prior period against staff costs incurred 
during the current year in relation to calls received in year in relation to last 
year’s sales.

•  Sensitivity analysis: Performing sensitivity testing on certain inputs to the 
calculation of the provision including average cost per claim, average period 
over which calls are received and the percentage of orders on which calls 
are received, in order to determine their impact on the calculations.

•  Assessing transparency: Determining whether the Group’s disclosures in 

relation to the provision, the assumptions on which it is based and 
sensitivities around those assumptions are adequate. 

Our results
•  We found the resulting estimate of the guarantee provision to be acceptable 

(2017: acceptable).

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018SRCGFS86

Independent auditor’s report  
continued

2. Key audit matters: our assessment of risks of material misstatement continued

Valuation of intangible assets 
identified on acquisition of 
Sofology

Brand intangible asset identified  
at £13.8m and goodwill of 
£28.4m.

Refer to page 52 (Audit 
Committee Report), page 98 
(accounting policy) and page 107 
(financial disclosures).

The risk

Our response

On 30 November 2017 the Group 
acquired Sofology Limited for £25m.

Our procedures included: 
•  Our sector expertise: using our knowledge of the business and industry 

Accounting treatment
In accounting for the acquisition, the 
Group needs to ensure all identifiable 
assets are recognised at their 
acquisition-date fair values. There is a 
risk that not all intangibles which have 
previously not been recognised by 
Sofology are appropriately identified on 
acquisition.

Subjective estimate
In addition, the valuation of the brand 
intangible asset of £13.8m requires a 
significant degree of judgement with 
estimates including the timing of  
future cash flows and the discount  
rate applied.

to challenge the key assumptions used in identifying separately 
recognisable intangible assets. 

•  Methodology evaluation: assessing and evaluating the methodology 

used by the Group to value the brand asset acquired. 

•  Benchmarking assumptions: with the assistance of our valuation 

specialists challenging the key assumptions used in the valuation of the 
brand intangible such as the timing of future cash flows and discount rate. 

•  Assessing transparency: considering the adequacy of the financial 
statement disclosures in respect of critical accounting estimates and 
judgements relating to intangible assets recognised on acquisitions.

Our results
•  We found the resulting identifiable intangible assets recognised on 

acquisition of Sofology (namely the brand intangible) to be acceptable.

3. Our application of materiality and an overview of the scope of our audit 
Materiality for the Group financial statements as a whole was set at £2.2m, determined with reference to a benchmark of Group profit 
before tax normalised to exclude non-underlying items as disclosed in note 3, of which it represents 5.9% (2017: 4.8%).

Materiality for the parent Company financial statements as a whole was set at £2.1m (2017:£2.4m), determined with reference to a 
benchmark of Company total assets, of which it represents 0.4% (2017: 0.6%). 

We agreed to report to the Audit Committee any corrected or uncorrected identified misstatements exceeding £0.11m, in addition to 
other identified misstatements that warranted reporting on qualitative grounds.

The Group team performed the full-scope audits for Group purposes of all 9 (2017: all 8) of the Group’s components, including the audit 
of the parent Company. The components were audited to component materialities, which ranged from £0.04m to £2.1m, having regard 
to the mix of size and risk profile of the Group across the components.

Group profit before tax normalised 
for non-underlying items 
£37.2m 

(2017: profit before tax £50.1m)

Group Materiality

£2.2m
(2017: £2.4) 

£2.2m
Whole financial statements
materiality (2017: £2.4m)

£2.1m
Range of materiality at   
9 components (£0.4m to £2.1m) 
(2017: £0.2m to £2.4m) 

£0.11m
Misstatements reported to the 
Audit Committee (2017: £0.12m)

DFS Annual report & accounts 201887

Group revenue

Group profit before tax

Group total assets

100%

2017: 100%

100%

2017: 100%

100%

2017: 100%

100
100

100
100

100
100

Full scope for Group audit purposes 2018
Full scope for Group audit purposes 2017

Full scope for Group audit purposes 2018
Full scope for Group audit purposes 2017

Full scope for Group audit purposes 2018
Full scope for Group audit purposes 2017

4. We have nothing to report on going concern 
We are required to report to you if:

•  we have anything material to add or draw attention to in relation to the Directors’ statement in note 1 to the financial statements on the 

use of the going concern basis of accounting with no material uncertainties that may cast significant doubt over the Group and 
Company’s use of that basis for a period of at least twelve months from the date of approval of the financial statements; or 

•  the related statement under the Listing Rules set out on page 17 is materially inconsistent with our audit knowledge.

We have nothing to report in these respects.

5. We have nothing to report on the other information in the Annual Report
The Directors are responsible for the other information presented in the Annual Report together with the financial statements. Our 
opinion on the financial statements does not cover the other information and, accordingly, we do not express an audit opinion or, except 
as explicitly stated below, any form of assurance conclusion thereon.

Our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, consider whether, based on our financial statements audit work, the 
information therein is materially misstated or inconsistent with the financial statements or our audit knowledge. Based solely on that work 
we have not identified material misstatements in the other information.

Strategic report and Directors’ report
Based solely on our work on the other information:

•  we have not identified material misstatements in the Strategic report and the Directors’ report; 
• 
• 

in our opinion the information given in those reports for the financial year is consistent with the financial statements; and 
in our opinion those reports have been prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 2006.

Directors’ remuneration report
In our opinion the part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report to be audited has been properly prepared in accordance with the 
Companies Act 2006.

Disclosures of principal risks and longer-term viability
Based on the knowledge we acquired during our financial statements audit, we have nothing material to add or draw attention to in 
relation to:

•  the Directors’ confirmation within the Strategic Report on page 12 that they have carried out a robust assessment of the principal 

risks facing the Group, including those that would threaten its business model, future performance, solvency and liquidity;
•  the Risks and Uncertainties disclosures describing these risks and explaining how they are being managed and mitigated; and
•  the Directors’ explanation in the Viability Statement of how they have assessed the prospects of the Group, over what period they 
have done so and why they considered that period to be appropriate, and their statement as to whether they have a reasonable 
expectation that the Group will be able to continue in operation and meet its liabilities as they fall due over the period of their 
assessment, including any related disclosures drawing attention to any necessary qualifications or assumptions.

Under the Listing Rules we are required to review the Viability Statement. We have nothing to report in this respect. 

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018SRCGFS88

Independent auditor’s report  
continued

5. We have nothing to report on the other information in the Annual Report continued
Corporate governance disclosures
We are required to report to you if:

•  we have identified material inconsistencies between the knowledge we acquired during our financial statements audit and the 
Directors’ statement that they consider that the annual report and financial statements taken as a whole is fair, balanced and 
understandable and provides the information necessary for shareholders to assess the Group’s position and performance, business 
model and strategy; or

•  the section of the annual report describing the work of the Audit Committee does not appropriately address matters communicated 

by us to the Audit Committee.

We are required to report to you if the Corporate Governance Statement does not properly disclose a departure from the eleven 
provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code specified by the Listing Rules for our review.

We have nothing to report in these respects.

6. We have nothing to report on the other matters on which we are required to report by exception
Under the Companies Act 2006, we are required to report to you if, in our opinion:

•  adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent Company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been received 

from branches not visited by us; or

•  the parent Company financial statements and the part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report to be audited are not in agreement with 

the accounting records and returns; or

•  certain disclosures of Directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or 
•  we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit.

We have nothing to report in these respects.

7. Respective responsibilities
Directors’ responsibilities
As explained more fully in their statement set out on page 83, the Directors are responsible for: the preparation of the financial 
statements including being satisfied that they give a true and fair view; such internal control as they determine is necessary to enable the 
preparation of financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error; assessing the Group and 
parent Company’s ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern; and using the 
going concern basis of accounting unless they either intend to liquidate the Group or the parent Company or to cease operations, or 
have no realistic alternative but to do so.

Auditor’s responsibilities
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as a whole are free from material 
misstatement, whether due to fraud or other irregularities (see below), or error, and to issue our opinion in an auditor’s report. 
Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, but does not guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will 
always detect a material misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud, other irregularities or error and are considered 
material if, individually or in aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the 
basis of the financial statements.

A fuller description of our responsibilities is provided on the FRC’s website at www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities.

Irregularities – ability to detect
We identified areas of laws and regulations that could reasonably be expected to have a material effect on the financial statements from 
our sector experience, through discussion with the Directors and other management (as required by auditing standards), and from 
inspection of the Group’s regulatory and legal correspondence.

We had regard to laws and regulations in areas that directly affect the financial statements including financial reporting (including related 
company legislation) and taxation legislation. We considered the extent of compliance with those laws and regulations as part of our 
procedures on the related financial statement items.

In addition we considered the impact of laws and regulations in the specific areas of financial service regulation recognising the nature of 
the Group’s activities. With the exception of any known or possible non-compliance, and as required by auditing standards, our work in 
respect of these was limited to enquiry of the Directors and other management and inspection of regulatory and legal correspondence. 

DFS Annual report & accounts 201889

We communicated identified laws and regulations throughout our team and remained alert to any indications of non-compliance 
throughout the audit.

As with any audit, there remained a higher risk of non-detection of non-compliance with relevant laws and regulations (irregularities), as 
these may involve collusion, forgery, intentional omissions, misrepresentations, or the override of internal controls.

8. The purpose of our audit work and to whom we owe our responsibilities
This report is made solely to the Company’s members, as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006. 
Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the Company’s members those matters we are required to state to them 
in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility to 
anyone other than the Company and the Company’s members, as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we  
have formed.

Chris Hearld (Senior Statutory Auditor)
for and on behalf of KPMG LLP, Statutory Auditor
Chartered Accountants
1 Sovereign Square
Sovereign Street 
Leeds
LS1 4DA

3 October 2018 

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018SRCGFS90

Consolidated income statement
for 52 weeks ended 28 July 2018 (52 weeks ended 29 July 2017)

Gross sales

Revenue
Cost of sales

Gross profit
Selling and distribution costs
Administrative expenses

Operating profit before depreciation and amortisation
Depreciation
Amortisation

Operating profit
Finance income
Finance expenses

Profit before tax
Taxation

Profit for the year

Earnings per share
Basic
Diluted

Underlying
£m

1,125.6

Note

1,2

2018

Non-
underlying
£m

–

–
–

–
–
(9.9)

(9.9)
–
–

(9.9)
–
(1.5)

(11.4)
0.7

(10.7)

2017

Total
£m

Total
£m

1,125.6

990.8

870.5
(363.6)

506.9
(380.6)
(60.1)

66.2
(24.1)
(4.2)

37.9
0.1
(12.2)

25.8
(7.0)

18.8

762.7
(314.2)

448.5
(328.0)
(38.1)

82.4
(19.4)
(2.5)

60.5
0.2
(10.6)

50.1
(10.6)

39.5

870.5
(363.6)

506.9
(380.6)
(50.2)

76.1
(24.1)
(4.2)

47.8
0.1
(10.7)

37.2
(7.7)

29.5

14.0p
13.9p

(5.1)p
(5.0)p

8.9p
8.9p

18.7p
18.6p

2

3

2,3
5
5

6

7
7

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018 
 
 
 
91

Consolidated statement of comprehensive income
for 52 weeks ended 28 July 2018 (52 weeks ended 29 July 2017)

Profit for the year

Other comprehensive income
Items that are or may be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss: 
Effective portion of changes in fair value of cash flow hedges
Net change in fair value of cash flow hedges reclassified to profit or loss
Income tax on items that are or may be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss

Other comprehensive expense for the year, net of income tax

Total comprehensive income for the year

2018
£m

18.8

2017
£m

39.5

4.7
6.3
(1.6)

9.4

1.8
(5.8)
0.8

(3.2)

28.2

36.3

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 201892

Consolidated balance sheet
at 28 July 2018 (29 July 2017)

Non-current assets
  Property, plant and equipment
  Intangible assets
  Other financial assets
  Deferred tax assets

Current assets
  Inventories
  Other financial assets
  Trade and other receivables
  Cash and cash equivalents

Total assets

Current liabilities
  Trade payables and other liabilities
  Provisions
  Other financial liabilities
  Current tax liabilities

Non-current liabilities
  Interest bearing loans and borrowings
  Provisions
  Other financial liabilities
  Other liabilities

Total liabilities

Net assets

Equity attributable to owners of the Company
  Share capital
  Share premium
  Merger reserve
  Treasury shares
  Cash flow hedging reserve
  Retained earnings

Total equity

Note

2018
£m

2017
£m

8
9
11
12

13
11
14

15
19
16

17
19
16
15

21
21
21
21
21

91.1
537.0
1.6
8.0

637.7

54.4
3.7
31.2
47.2

136.5

774.2

(228.5)
(4.9)
(0.1)
(2.7)

(236.2)

(195.7)
(5.9)
(1.1)
(82.9)

(285.6)

74.2
491.8
–
9.8

575.8

36.6
–
24.5
61.0

122.1

697.9

(165.6)
(5.1)
(3.5)
(3.8)

(178.0)

(198.8)
(5.2)
(3.5)
(67.3)

(274.8)

(521.8)

(452.8)

252.4

245.1

319.5
40.4
18.6
(3.3)
4.0
(126.8)

252.4

319.5
40.4
18.6
(3.7)
(7.0)
(122.7)

245.1

These financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors on 3 October 2018 and were signed on its behalf by:

Ian Filby  
Chief Executive Officer 

Company registered number: 7236769

Nicola Bancroft
Chief Financial Officer 

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
93

Consolidated statement of changes in equity

Balance at 30 July 2016

Profit for the year
Other comprehensive income/(expense)

Total comprehensive income/(expense) for the year

Dividends
Share based payments

Balance at 29 July 2017

Profit for the year
Other comprehensive income/(expense)

Total comprehensive income/(expense) for the year

Dividends
Treasury shares issued
Share based payments

Balance at 28 July 2018

Share
capital
£m

319.5

Share 
premium
£m

40.4

Merger 
reserve
£m

18.6

Treasury 
shares
£m

Cash flow 
hedging 
reserve
£m

Retained
earnings
£m

Total
equity
£m

(3.7)

(3.0)

(121.2)

250.6

–
–

–

–
–

–
–

–

–
–

–
–

–

–
–

–
–

–

–
–

–
(4.0)

(4.0)

–
–

39.5
0.8

40.3

(43.8)
2.0

39.5
(3.2)

36.3

(43.8)
2.0

319.5

40.4

18.6

(3.7)

(7.0)

(122.7)

245.1

–
–

–

–
–
–

–
–

–

–
–
–

–
–

–

–
–
–

–
–

–

–
0.4
–

–
11.0

11.0

–
–
–

18.8
(1.6)

17.2

(23.7)
(0.4)
2.8

18.8
9.4

28.2

(23.7)
–
2.8

319.5

40.4

18.6

(3.3)

4.0

(126.8)

252.4

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 201894

Consolidated cash flow statement
for 52 weeks ended 28 July 2018 (52 weeks ended 29 July 2017)

Operating profit
  Adjustments for:
  Depreciation, amortisation and impairment
  Gain on sale of property, plant and equipment
  Accrued acquisition consideration
  Share based payment expense
  Increase in trade and other receivables
  Increase in inventories
  Increase in trade and other payables
  Decrease in provisions 

  Tax paid

Net cash from operating activities

Cash flows from investing activities
  Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment
  Interest received
  Acquisition of subsidiaries
  Acquisition of trade assets
  Acquisition of property, plant and equipment
  Acquisition of other intangible assets

Net cash from investing activities

Cash flows from financing activities
  Proceeds from new loan
  Interest paid
  Exceptional refinancing costs
  Repayment of borrowings
  Payment of finance lease liabilities
  Ordinary dividends paid
  Special dividends paid 

Net cash from financing activities

  Net decrease in cash and cash equivalents
  Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

Note

26

2018
£m

37.9

28.3
(0.9)
5.0
2.8
(1.7)
(4.7)
11.0
(1.1)

76.6
(9.1)

67.5

1.0
0.1
(20.1)
(1.2)
(17.3)
(4.7)

(42.2)

197.0
(7.4)
(1.9)
(200.0)
(3.1)
(23.7)
–

(39.1)

(13.8)
61.0

47.2

2017
£m

60.5

21.9
(0.8)
–
2.0
1.9
(1.7)
2.2
(1.5)

84.5
(9.7)

74.8

1.0
0.2
–
–
(25.2)
(3.1)

(27.1)

–
(7.3)
–
–
(2.3)
(23.7)
(20.1)

(53.4)

(5.7)
66.7

61.0

DFS Annual report & accounts 201895

Notes to the consolidated financial statements
at 28 July 2018

1 Accounting policies
DFS Furniture plc (“the Company”) is a company incorporated and domiciled in the United Kingdom.

The consolidated financial statements consolidate those of the Company and its subsidiaries (together referred to as “the Group”).  
The parent company financial statements present information about the Company as a separate entity and not about its Group.

The accounting policies set out below have, unless otherwise stated, been applied consistently to all periods presented in these 
consolidated financial statements. Judgements made by the Directors, in the application of these accounting policies that have significant 
effect on the financial statements and estimates with a significant risk of material adjustment in the next year are discussed in note 1.16.

1.1 Basis of preparation
The consolidated financial statements have been prepared and approved by the Directors in accordance with International Financial 
Reporting Standards as adopted by the EU (“Adopted IFRS”). The financial statements are prepared on the historical cost basis except 
for certain financial instruments and share based payment charges which are measured at their fair value. The financial statements are 
for the 52 weeks to 28 July 2018 (last year 52 weeks to 29 July 2017).

The Company has elected to prepare its parent company financial statements in accordance with UK GAAP; these are presented on 
pages 118 to 121.

Presentation of financial statements
Following the acquisition of Sofology Limited, the Directors have reflected on the continuing need to provide relevant financial information 
to shareholders as the Group grows and develops. As a consequence, with effect from the financial year commencing 30 July 2017 the 
analysis of operating expenses on the face of the income statement has been expanded to separate direct cost of sales (cost of goods, 
related costs of shipping) from other selling and distribution costs (advertising, wages and other store costs, delivery and customer 
service costs). Disclosures of amounts charged to operating profit in respect of cost of inventories has also been revised to align with the 
new presentation.

In addition, segmental analysis presented in accordance with IFRS 8 has been amended to provide a separate analysis of the Group’s 
major brands in order to more closely reflect the way in which the enlarged Group reviews and manages its operations. The directors 
consider that this revised presentation will provide shareholders and other users of the financial statements with useful additional relevant 
information in order to evaluate the nature and financial effects of the different business activities in which the Group engages.

These changes have no effect on reported operating profit and all comparatives presented have been restated in line with the new 
presentation.

Going concern
The market in which the Group operates continues to present a number of challenges. Nevertheless, the Group remains highly cash 
generative and currently has sufficient medium and long term facilities in place, including a £230.0 million revolving credit facility in place 
until August 2022. Further details of these facilities and the Group’s financial management objectives are detailed in the financial statements.

On the basis of their assessment of the Group’s financial position, forecasts and projections, the Company’s Directors have a reasonable 
expectation that the Company and the Group will be able to continue in operational existence as detailed in the Viability Statement on 
page 17. Thus they continue to adopt the going concern basis of accounting in preparing the annual financial statements.

1.2 Basis of consolidation
The consolidated financial statements incorporate the financial statements of the Company and entities controlled by the Company (its 
subsidiaries). Control exists when the Group is exposed to or has rights to variable returns from its investment with the investee and has 
the ability to affect those returns through its power over the investee. In assessing control, potential voting rights that are currently 
exercisable or convertible are taken into account.

The results of subsidiaries acquired or disposed of during the year are included in the consolidated income statement from the date that 
control commences until the date that control ceases. The acquisition method is used to account for the acquisition of subsidiaries. All 
intra-group transactions, balances, income and expenses are eliminated on consolidation.

1.3 Gross sales and revenue
Revenue is measured at the fair value of the consideration receivable by the Group for the provision of goods to external customers, 
being the total amount payable by the customer (“gross sales”) less: value added and other sales taxes, the costs of obtaining interest 
free credit on behalf of customers and the amounts payable to third parties relating to products for which the Group acts as an agent. 
For products where the Group acts as an agent, the amount recognised in revenue is the net fee receivable by the Group.

Many of the Group’s customers choose to take advantage of the interest-free credit that the Group makes available. This credit is provided 
by external finance houses, who pay the Group the gross sales value of the customer order on delivery, less a fee for taking responsibility 
for payment collection and bearing the full credit risk for any future default by the customer. The fee due to the finance house varies 
depending on the amount borrowed by the customer, the length of the repayment term and the LIBOR rate at the time of the transaction.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 201896

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
at 28 July 2018

1 Accounting policies continued
1.3 Gross sales and revenue continued
In calculating reported revenue in accordance with IFRS the Group is required to deduct these fees from the value of the customer order. 
Reported revenue will therefore vary depending on the proportion of customers who choose to take up the interest free credit offer, the 
average duration of the interest free loan period and the prevailing LIBOR rates.

For the purposes of managing its business the Group focuses on gross sales, which is defined as the total amount payable by 
customers, inclusive of VAT and other sales taxes and prior to any accounting adjustments for interest-free credit fees or aftercare 
product costs. The Directors believe gross sales is a more transparent measure of the activity levels and performance of its stores and 
online channels as it is not affected by customer preferences on payment options. Accordingly gross sales is presented in this annual 
report in addition to statutory revenue as an alternative performance measure, with a reconciliation between the two measures provided 
in note 2 to the financial statements.

Both gross sales and revenue are stated net of returns and sales allowances, and are recognised when goods have been delivered to 
the customer, the revenue and costs in respect of the transaction can be measured reliably and collectability is reasonably assured.

1.4 Expenses
Non-underlying and exceptional items
Items that are material in size, unusual or non-recurring in nature are disclosed separately in the income statement in order to provide an 
indication of the Group’s underlying business performance without distortion from significant non-trading events. The principal items 
which may be included as non-underlying are:
•  significant profit or loss on the disposal of non-current assets
• 
•  significant non-recurring tax charges or credits 
•  costs associated with significant corporate, financial or operating restructuring, including acquisitions or the establishment of 

impairment charges

operations in new geographical territories

Material finance income or expenses associated with significant changes in the Group’s borrowings are disclosed separately as 
exceptional items below operating profit.

Royalty payments
Royalties payable to brand partners on sales of branded products are charged to cost of sales when the related product is delivered to 
the customer.

Operating lease payments
Payments made under operating leases are recognised in the income statement on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease. Lease 
incentives received are recognised in the income statement as an integral part of the total lease expense. 

Finance lease payments
Minimum lease payments are apportioned between the finance charge and the reduction of the outstanding liability. The finance charge 
is allocated to each period during the lease term so as to produce a constant periodic rate of interest on the remaining balance of 
the liability.

Finance income and expenses
Finance expenses comprise interest payable, finance charges on finance leases recognised in profit or loss using the effective interest 
method and unwinding of the discount on provisions and other liabilities measures at present value. Finance income comprises interest 
receivable on funds invested, dividend income, and net foreign exchange gains.

Interest income and interest payable is recognised in profit or loss as it accrues, using the effective interest method. Dividend income is 
recognised in the income statement on the date the Group’s right to receive payments is established.

1.5 Employee benefits
Defined contribution plans
Payments to defined contribution pension plans are recognised as an expense in the income statement as they fall due.

Short-term benefits
Short-term employee benefit obligations are measured on an undiscounted basis and are expensed as the related service is provided.

Share based payments
The fair value of equity settled share based payments is recognised as an expense over the vesting period of the related awards, with a 
corresponding increase in equity. Fair values are calculated using option pricing models appropriate to the terms and conditions of the 
awards. The amount charged as an expense is regularly reviewed and adjusted to reflect the achievement of service and non-market 
based performance conditions.

DFS Annual report & accounts 201897

1 Accounting policies continued
1.6 Taxation
Tax on the profit or loss for the year comprises current and deferred tax. Tax is recognised in the income statement except to the extent 
that it relates to a business combination, or items recognised directly in equity or other comprehensive income.

Current tax is the expected tax payable or receivable on the taxable income or loss for the year, using tax rates enacted or substantively 
enacted at the balance sheet date, and any adjustment to tax payable in respect of previous years.

Deferred tax is provided on temporary differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities for financial reporting purposes 
and the amounts used for taxation purposes. The following temporary differences are not provided for: the initial recognition of goodwill; 
the initial recognition of assets or liabilities in a transaction that is not a business combination and that affects neither accounting nor 
taxable profit or loss; and differences relating to investments in subsidiaries to the extent that they will probably not reverse in the 
foreseeable future. The amount of deferred tax provided is based on the expected manner of realisation or settlement of the carrying 
amount of assets and liabilities, using tax rates enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date.

At interim reporting periods the tax charge is calculated in accordance with IAS 34, adjusted for material non-taxable items.

A deferred tax asset is recognised on deductible temporary differences only to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profits will 
be available against which they can be utilised. Deferred tax assets are reviewed at each reporting date and are reduced to the extent 
that it is no longer probable that the related tax benefit will be realised.

1.7 Foreign currency
Transactions in foreign currencies are translated to the respective functional currencies of Group entities at the foreign exchange rate 
ruling at the date of the transaction.

Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies at the balance sheet date are retranslated to the functional currency at 
the foreign exchange rate ruling at that date. Foreign exchange differences arising on translation are recognised in the income statement 
except for differences arising on qualifying cash flow hedges, which are recognised directly in other comprehensive income.

1.8 Business combinations
Subject to the transitional relief in IFRS 1, all business combinations are accounted for by applying the acquisition method. Business 
combinations are accounted for using the acquisition method as at the acquisition date, which is the date on which control is transferred 
to the Group.

Goodwill is initially measured at cost, being the excess of the acquisition cost over the Group’s interest in the assets and liabilities 
recognised. When the excess is negative, a bargain purchase gain is recognised immediately in profit or loss.

Costs related to the acquisition, other than those associated with the issue of debt or equity securities, are expensed as incurred.

Any contingent consideration payable is recognised at fair value at the acquisition date. If the contingent consideration is classified as 
equity, it is not remeasured and settlement is accounted for within equity. Otherwise, subsequent changes to the fair value of the 
contingent consideration are recognised in profit or loss.

Acquisitions prior to 31 July 2011 (date of transition to IFRSs)
IFRS 1 grants certain exemptions from the full requirements of Adopted IFRSs in the transition period. The Group and Company elected 
not to restate business combinations that took place prior to 31 July 2011. In respect of acquisitions prior to transition, goodwill is 
included at 31 July 2011 on the basis of its deemed cost, which represents the amount recorded under UK GAAP which was broadly 
comparable save that goodwill was amortised. On transition, amortisation of goodwill ceased as required by IFRS 1.

1.9 Property, plant and equipment
Property, plant and equipment are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation and accumulated impairment losses.

Where parts of an item of property, plant and equipment have different useful lives, they are accounted for as separate items of property, 
plant and equipment.

Leases in which the Group assumes substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership of the leased asset are classified as finance 
leases. Where land and buildings are held under leases the accounting treatment of the land is considered separately from that of the 
buildings. Leased assets acquired by way of finance lease are stated at an amount equal to the lower of their fair value and the present 
value of the minimum lease payments at inception of the lease, less accumulated depreciation and less accumulated impairment losses. 
Lease payments are accounted for as described in 1.4 above.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 201898

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
at 28 July 2018

1 Accounting policies continued
1.9 Property, plant and equipment continued
Depreciation is charged to the income statement on a straight-line basis over the estimated useful lives of each part of an item of 
property, plant and equipment. Land is not depreciated. The estimated useful lives are as follows:
•  buildings 
•  plant and equipment 
•  motor vehicles   

50 years
3 to 10 years
4 years

Depreciation methods, useful lives and residual values are reviewed at each balance sheet date.

1.10 Intangible assets and goodwill
Goodwill
Goodwill is stated at cost less any accumulated impairment losses. Goodwill is allocated to cash generating units and is not amortised 
but is tested annually for impairment.

Other intangible assets
Expenditure on internally generated goodwill and brands is recognised in the income statement as an expense as incurred.

Other intangible assets that are acquired by the Group are stated at cost less accumulated amortisation and accumulated 
impairment losses.

Amortisation
Amortisation is charged to the income statement on a straight-line basis over the estimated useful lives of intangible assets unless such 
lives are indefinite. Intangible assets with an indefinite useful life and goodwill are systematically tested for impairment at each balance 
sheet date. Other intangible assets are amortised from the date they are available for use. Estimated useful lives are as follows:
•  computer software and website costs 
•  acquired brand names 

3 years
10 to 20 years

1.11 Inventories
Inventories are stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value. The cost of finished goods manufactured by the Group includes direct 
materials, direct labour and appropriate overhead expenditure.

1.12 Impairment
The carrying amounts of the Group’s tangible and intangible assets other than goodwill are reviewed at each reporting date to determine 
whether there is any indication of impairment. If any such indication exists, then the asset’s recoverable amount is estimated. For 
goodwill, and intangible assets that have indefinite useful lives or that are not yet available for use, the recoverable amount is estimated 
each year at the same time.

An impairment loss is recognised if the carrying amount of an asset exceeds its estimated recoverable amount. Impairment losses are 
recognised in profit or loss.

An impairment loss in respect of goodwill is not reversed. In respect of other assets, impairment losses recognised in prior periods are 
assessed at each reporting date for any indications that the loss has decreased or no longer exists. An impairment loss is reversed if 
there has been a change in the estimates used to determine the recoverable amount. An impairment loss is reversed only to the extent 
that the asset’s carrying amount does not exceed the carrying amount that would have been determined, net of depreciation or 
amortisation, if no impairment loss had been recognised.

1.13 Provisions
A provision is recognised in the balance sheet when the Group has a present legal or constructive obligation as a result of a past event, 
that can be reliably measured and it is probable that an outflow of economic benefits will be required to settle the obligation. Provisions 
are determined by discounting the expected future cash flows at a pre-tax rate that reflects risks specific to the liability.

Details of provisions recognised are in note 19 and the related significant estimates and judgments in note 1.16.

1.14 Non-derivative financial instruments
Non-derivative financial instruments comprise investments in equity and debt securities, trade and other receivables, cash and cash 
equivalents, loans and borrowings, and trade and other payables.

Trade and other receivables
Trade and other receivables are recognised initially at fair value. Subsequent to initial recognition they are measured at amortised cost 
using the effective interest method, less any impairment losses.

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
99

1 Accounting policies continued
1.14 Non-derivative financial instruments continued
Trade and other payables
Trade and other payables are recognised initially at fair value. Subsequent to initial recognition they are measured at amortised cost 
using the effective interest method.

Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash balances and call deposits.

Interest-bearing borrowings
Interest-bearing borrowings are recognised initially at fair value less attributable transaction costs. Subsequent to initial recognition, 
interest-bearing borrowings are stated at amortised cost using the effective interest method.

1.15 Derivative financial instruments and hedging
Derivative financial instruments
Derivative financial instruments are recognised at fair value. The gain or loss on remeasurement to fair value is recognised immediately in 
profit or loss. However, where derivatives qualify for hedge accounting, recognition of any resultant gain or loss depends on the nature of 
the item being hedged (see below).

Cash flow hedges
Where a derivative financial instrument is designated as a hedge of the variability in cash flows of a highly probable forecast transaction, 
the effective part of any gain or loss on the derivative financial instrument is recognised directly in the hedging reserve. Any ineffective 
portion of the hedge is recognised immediately in the income statement.

When the forecast transaction subsequently results in the recognition of a non-financial asset or non-financial liability, the associated 
cumulative gain or loss remains in the hedging reserve and is reclassified into profit or loss in the same period or periods during which 
the asset acquired or liability assumed affects profit or loss.

For other cash flow hedges the associated cumulative gain or loss is removed from equity and recognised in the income statement in the 
same period or periods during which the hedged forecast transaction affects profit or loss.

When a hedging instrument expires or is sold, terminated or exercised, or the Group revokes designation of the hedge relationship but 
the hedged forecast transaction is still expected to occur, the cumulative gain or loss at that point remains in equity and is recognised in 
accordance with the above policy when the transaction occurs. If the hedged transaction is no longer expected to take place, the 
cumulative unrealised gain or loss recognised in equity is recognised in the income statement immediately.

1.16 Significant areas of estimation and judgment
In the application of the Group’s accounting policies, the directors are required to make judgments, estimates and assumptions that 
affect the value of reported assets, liabilities, revenues and expenses. The estimates and associated assumptions are based on historical 
experience and other relevant factors, but may differ from actual results. Significant areas of estimation for the Group include the costs of 
meeting customer guarantees and the period over which guarantee claims arise (note 19), the selling prices applied in determining net 
realisable values of inventories (note 13), the assessment of the fair value of acquired assets and liabilities (note 9), and the assumptions 
underlying the value in use calculation for the impairment of goodwill (note 9).

1.17 New accounting standards
A number of new or revised standards and interpretations have been issued which are not yet effective or endorsed by the EU, and 
which have not therefore been applied by the Group in these financial statements. These include IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with 
Customers and IFRS 9 Financial Instruments, which both apply to the Group from FY19, and IFRS 16 Leases, which applies to the Group 
from FY20.

IFRS 15 and IFRS 9 are not expected to have a material impact on the Group’s financial statements, but may result in additional 
disclosures being provided.

IFRS 16 will have a material impact on the future financial statements of the Group since it would require the substantial majority of the 
Group’s operating lease commitments to be brought on to the balance sheet, resulting in the recognition of significant lease assets and 
liabilities which would be depreciated and amortised separately. IFRS 16 will first apply to the Group for the financial year ending July 
2020 and work is underway to collect the required data and assess the necessary changes in processes and systems that will be 
required to implement the standard. The complexities of this implementation are such that it is not yet possible to quantify the effect on 
the Group’s financial statements. Disclosures on the Group’s operating lease commitments under current accounting standards are 
provided in note 25 to the financial statements.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 2018100

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
at 28 July 2018

2 Segmental analysis
The Group’s operating segments under IFRS 8 have been determined based on management accounts reports reviewed by the 
Executive Board. Segment performance is assessed based upon brand contribution. Brand contribution is defined as underlying 
EBITDA (being earnings before interest and tax excluding depreciation charges and non-underlying items) excluding property costs and 
central administration costs.

The Group reviews and manages the performance of its operations on a retail brand basis, and the identified reportable segments and 
the nature of their business activities are as follows:

DFS: 

the manufacture and retailing of upholstered furniture and related products through DFS branded stores and websites. 

Sofology: 

the retailing of upholstered furniture and related products through Sofology branded stores and website. 

Other segment activities comprise the retailing of upholstered and other furniture and related products through other brands, including 
Dwell and Sofa Workshop, which both fall below the thresholds in IFRS 8 for separate reporting

Segment revenue and profit

DFS
Sofology
Other segments
Eliminations

Gross sales

External sales

Internal sales

Total gross sales

2018
£m

898.5
155.2
71.9
–

1,125.6

2017
£m

925.0
–
65.8
–

990.8

2018
£m

–
–
0.6
(0.6)

–

2017
£m

–
–
0.6
(0.6)

2018
£m

898.5
155.2
72.5
(0.6)

2017
£m

925.0
–
66.4
(0.6)

–

1,125.6

990.8

Total segments gross sales
Less: value added and other sales taxes
Less: costs of interest free credit and aftercare products

Revenue

2018

Revenue
Cost of sales

Gross profit
Selling & distribution costs (excluding property costs)

Brand contribution (segment profit)
Property costs
Underlying administrative expenses

Underlying EBITDA

2017

Revenue
Cost of sales

Gross profit
Selling & distribution costs (excluding property costs)

Brand contribution (segment profit)
Property costs
Underlying administrative expenses

Underlying EBITDA

2018 
£m

1,125.6
(175.8)
(79.3)

870.5

Other
£m

58.5
(25.9)

32.6
(22.3)

10.3

DFS
£m

Sofology
£m

689.2
(276.7)

412.5
(223.9)

188.6

122.8
(61.0)

61.8
(35.3)

26.5

DFS
£m

Sofology
£m

709.2
(289.3)

419.9
(227.4)

192.5

–
–

–
–

–

Other
£m

53.5
(24.9)

28.6
(20.1)

8.5

2017
£m

990.8
(153.8)
(74.3)

762.7

Total
£m

870.5
(363.6)

506.9
(281.5)

225.4
(99.1)
(50.2)

76.1

Total
£m

762.7
(314.2)

448.5
(247.5)

201.0
(80.5)
(38.1)

82.4

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018101

2 Segmental analysis continued

Underlying EBITDA
Non-underlying items
Depreciation & amortisation

Operating profit
Finance income
Finance expenses 

Profit before tax

A geographical analysis of revenue is presented below:

United Kingdom
Europe

Total revenue

Segment assets and liabilities

DFS
Sofology
Other segments

Total segments
Loans and financing
Financial assets/(liabilities)
Current tax
Deferred tax
Eliminations

Total Group

2018 
£m

76.1
(9.9)
(28.3)

37.9
0.1
(12.2)

25.8

2018 
£m

839.7
30.8

870.5

2017
£m

82.4
–
(21.9)

60.5
0.2
(10.6)

50.1

2017 
£m

736.6
26.1

762.7

Assets

Liabilities

2018 
£m

662.4
87.3
33.5

783.2
–
5.3
–
8.0
(22.3)

774.2

2017
£m

676.5
–
29.4

705.9
–
–
–
9.8
(17.8)

2018 
£m

(249.6)
(61.7)
(33.2)

(344.5)
(195.7)
(1.2)
(2.7)
–
22.3

2017
£m

(233.5)
–
(27.5)

(261.0)
(198.8)
(7.0)
(3.8)
–
17.8

697.9

(521.8)

(452.8)

Segment assets comprises tangible and intangible non-current assets including goodwill and brand names, inventories, trade and  
other receivables, cash and cash equivalents. Segment liabilities comprises trade payables and current and non-current other liabilities 
and provisions.

DFS
Sofology
Other segments

Total Group

Additions to  
non-current assets

Depreciation  
and amortisation

2018 
£m

20.7
2.3
4.1

27.1

2017
£m

26.6
–
5.2

31.8

2018 
£m

21.4
4.3
2.6

28.3

2017
£m

20.0
–
1.9

21.9

Additions to non-current assets represents includes both tangible and intangible non-current assets but excludes amounts arising on 
acquisition.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 2018 
102

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
at 28 July 2018

3 Operating profit
Group operating profit is stated after charging/(crediting):

Depreciation on tangible assets
Net gain on disposal of property, plant and equipment
Amortisation of intangible assets
Cost of inventories recognised as an expense
Write down of inventories to net realisable value
Other cost of sales variances
Operating lease rentals

Non-underlying items
Acquisition related professional fees
Additional acquisition consideration
Integration costs 
Restructuring costs 

2018
£m

24.1
(0.9)
4.2
371.2
0.6
(8.2)
74.2

2018
£m

2.6
5.0
2.0
0.3

9.9

2017
£m

19.4
(0.8)
2.5
326.4
0.6
(12.8)
61.6

2017
£m

–
–
–
–

–

Acquisition related fees, additional consideration and integration costs arose on the Group’s acquisitions of Sofology Limited and certain 
assets from Multiyork (see note 9). Restructuring costs relate to the closure of the Group’s national distribution centre.

Auditor’s remuneration:
  Audit of these financial statements
  Audit of the financial statements of Group subsidiaries
Amounts receivable by the Company’s auditor and its associates in respect of:
  All other services

4 Staff numbers and costs
The average number of persons employed by the Group during the year, analysed by category, was as follows:

Production
Warehouse and transport
Sales and administration

The aggregate payroll costs of these persons were as follows:

Wages and salaries
Social security costs
Other pension costs

Share based payment expense (equity settled)

2018 
£m

0.1
0.1

0.1

0.3

2017
£m

0.1
0.1

–

0.2

Number of employees

2018

1,088
1,033
2,751

4,872

2018
£m

136.7
13.7
3.1

153.5
2.8

156.3

2017

1,136
837
2,319

4,292

2017
£m

124.7
12.4
2.5

139.6
2.0

141.6

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018103

5 Finance income and expense

Finance income
Interest income on bank deposits

Total finance income

Finance expense
Interest payable on senior loan facility
Interest payable on senior revolving credit facility
Bank fees
Fair value lease adjustment unwind (note 15)
Unwind of discount on provisions
Finance lease interest

Underlying finance expense
Non-underlying refinancing costs

Total finance expense

Non-underlying finance costs relate to the refinancing of the Group’s borrowings (note 17). 

6 Taxation
Recognised in the income statement 

Current tax 
Current year
Adjustments for prior years

Current tax expense

Deferred tax
Origination and reversal of temporary differences
Deferred tax rate change
Adjustments for prior years

Deferred tax expense

Total tax expense in income statement 

Reconciliation of effective tax rate

Profit before tax for the year

Tax using the UK corporation tax rate of 19.0% (2017: 19.67%)
Non-deductible expenses
Deferred tax rate change
Adjustments in respect of prior years 

Total tax expense 

2018
£m

0.1

0.1

(0.1)
(7.0)
(0.1)
(3.0)
(0.1)
(0.4)

(10.7)
(1.5)

(12.2)

2018
£m

8.2
(0.1)

8.1

(0.9)
–
(0.2)

(1.1)

7.0

2018
£m

25.8

4.9
2.4
–
(0.3)

7.0

2017
£m

0.2

0.2

(7.1)
–
(0.2)
(2.9)
(0.1)
(0.3)

(10.6)
–

(10.6)

2017
£m

11.3
(0.8)

10.5

(0.7)
0.6
0.2

0.1

10.6

2017
£m

50.1

9.8
0.8
0.6
(0.6)

10.6

The Finance Act 2016, which was substantively enacted in September 2016, included provisions to reduce the rate of UK corporation tax to 
19% with effect from 1 April 2017 and 17% with effect from 1 April 2020. Deferred taxation is measured at tax rates that are expected to apply in 
the periods in which temporary timing differences are expected to reverse based on tax rates and laws that have been enacted or substantively 
enacted at the balance sheet date. Accordingly, 17% has been applied when calculating deferred tax assets and liabilities at 28 July 2018.

Income tax recognised in other comprehensive income

Effective portion of changes in fair value of cash flow hedges
Net change in fair value of cash flow hedges reclassified to profit or loss
Deferred tax asset in respect of share based payments

2018 
£m

0.8
1.0
(0.2)

1.6

2017 
£m

0.3
(0.9)
(0.2)

(0.8)

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 2018104

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
at 28 July 2018

7 Earnings per share
Statutory earnings per share
Basic earnings per share is calculated by dividing the net profit or loss for the financial period attributable to ordinary equity holders of 
the parent Company by the weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding during the period. The weighted average number 
of shares reflects the movements in share capital detailed in note 21 and the impact of movements in treasury shares held by the 
Company. Changes in the Company’s capital structure with no corresponding change in resources are reflected as if they had occurred 
at the beginning of the earliest period presented.

Diluted earnings per share is calculated using the same net profit or loss for the financial period attributable to ordinary equity holders of 
the parent Company, but increasing the weighted average number of ordinary shares by the dilutive effect of potential ordinary shares.

Basic total earnings per share

Diluted total earnings per share

Profit for the year attributable to equity holders of the parent Company

2018 
pence

8.9

8.9

2018 
£m

18.8

2018 
No.

2017
pence

18.7

18.6

2017
£m

39.5

2017
No.

Weighted average number of shares in issue for basic earnings per share
Dilutive effect of employee share based payment awards

Weighted average number of shares in issue for diluted earnings per share

211,631,564
1,301,607

211,530,721
753,518

212,933,171

212,284,239

Underlying earnings per share
Underlying basic earnings per share and underlying diluted earnings per share are calculated by dividing the profit for the period 
attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent Company, as adjusted to exclude the effect of non-underlying items, by the same 
weighted average numbers of ordinary shares above used for basic and diluted earnings per share respectively.

Profit for the year attributable to equity holders of the parent Company
Non-underlying loss after tax

Underlying profit for the year attributable to equity holders of the parent Company

Underlying basic earnings per share

Underlying diluted earnings per share

2018 
£m

18.8
10.7

29.5

2018 
pence

14.0

13.9

2017
£m

39.5
–

39.5

2017
pence

18.7

18.6

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018105

Land and
 buildings
£m

Plant and
 equipment
£m

Motor 
vehicles
£m

Total
£m

121.5
28.7
(3.1)

147.1

22.4
18.7
(8.6)

95.2
19.6
–

114.8

15.8
17.1
(3.7)

19.8
7.9
(3.1)

24.6

5.7
1.6
(4.7)

144.0

27.2

179.6

46.7
13.7
–

60.4

17.8
(3.7)

74.5

48.5

54.4

69.5

8.8
5.5
(2.9)

11.4

6.1
(4.6)

12.9

11.0

13.2

14.3

56.4
19.4
(2.9)

72.9

24.1
(8.5)

88.5

65.1

74.2

91.1

6.5
1.2
–

7.7

0.9
–
(0.2)

8.4

0.9
0.2
–

1.1

0.2
(0.2)

1.1

5.6

6.6

7.3

8 Property, plant and equipment

Cost
Balance at 30 July 2016
Additions
Disposals

Balance at 29 July 2017

Additions
Acquisitions
Disposals

Balance at 28 July 2018

Depreciation and impairment 
Balance at 30 July 2016
Depreciation charge for the year
Disposals

Balance at 29 July 2017

Depreciation charge for the year
Disposals

Balance at 28 July 2018

Net book value
At 30 July 2016

At 29 July 2017

At 28 July 2018

Leased plant and machinery
Included in the total net book value of motor vehicles is £9.2m (2017: £5.3m) in respect of assets held under finance leases. Depreciation 
for the year on these assets was £3.2m (2017: £2.3m).

Capital commitments
At 28 July 2018 the Group had contracted capital commitments of £3.9m (2017: £3.4m) for which no provision has been made in the 
financial statements.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 2018 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
106

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
at 28 July 2018

9 Intangible assets

Cost
Balance at 30 July 2016
Additions

Balance at 29 July 2017

Additions
Acquisitions

Balance at 28 July 2018

Amortisation and impairment 
Balance at 30 July 2016
Amortisation charge for the year

Balance at 29 July 2017

Amortisation charge for the year

Balance at 28 July 2018

Net book value
At 30 July 2016

At 29 July 2017

At 28 July 2018

Goodwill
The carrying amount of goodwill is allocated to the following cash generating units:

DFS Trading Limited
Sofology Limited
The Sofa Workshop Limited
DFS Spain

Computer 
software
£m

Brand
names
£m

Goodwill
£m

Total
£m

12.0
3.1

15.1

4.7
1.3

21.1

8.5
2.4

10.9

3.1

14.0

3.5

4.2

7.1

3.0
–

3.0

–
13.8

16.8

0.3
0.1

0.4

1.1

1.5

2.7

2.6

15.3

485.0
–

485.0

–
29.6

500.0
3.1

503.1

4.7
44.7

514.6

552.5

–
–

–

–

–

8.8
2.5

11.3

4.2

15.5

485.0

485.0

514.6

491.2

491.8

537.0

Goodwill

2018 
£m

479.9
28.4
5.3
1.0

514.6

2017
£m

479.6
–
4.4
1.0

485.0

Goodwill is tested annually for impairment on the basis of value in use. The key assumptions underlying the calculations are those 
regarding expected future sales volumes, changes in selling prices and direct costs and the discount rate applied.

Cash flow forecasts are prepared from the latest financial results and internal budgets for the next four years, which take into account 
external macroeconomic indicators as well as internal growth expectations. Selling prices and related costs are based on past practice 
and expected future changes in the market. A terminal value was then calculated on the basis of the four year plan and the expected 
long-term growth rate for the UK living room furniture sector of 2.3%. These cash flow forecasts were then discounted at a pre-tax 
discount rate of 10.1% (2017: 9.7%). The discount rates are estimated based on the Group’s weighted average cost of capital, risk 
adjusted for an individual unit’s circumstances. 

The Group has applied sensitivities to assess whether any reasonably possible changes in assumptions could cause an impairment that 
would be material to these consolidated financial statements. A discount rate in excess of 14.6% would need to be applied to the base 
case cash flows in order for there to be any indication of an impairment. Even with an assumption of no further growth beyond the four 
year budgeted period, the calculated value in use remained above the carrying value. An impairment could arise if there was both no 
growth in future cash flows over the four year budgeted period and the terminal growth rate in the market also reduced to 0.8%.

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018 
 
 
 
107

9 Intangible assets continued
Business combinations
Sofology
On 30 November 2017 the Group acquired 100% of the issued share capital of Sofology Limited, a UK based living room furniture retailer 
with a focus on upholstered furniture. This acquisition has added a further strong distinctive brand to the Group’s current portfolio, 
supporting the Group’s existing strategy of developing its appeal to a broader range of customers. 

Initial consideration payable was £26.0m (equivalent to a debt-free cash-free valuation of £25.0m), with deferred contingent consideration 
payable based on underlying earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and amortisation for the 12 months ended 30 September 2018 
(the “earn-out period”). Based on the immediate post-acquisition performance of the acquired business, the Directors estimated that no 
further consideration would be payable, and this is reflected in the acquisition accounting.

At the date of this annual report, although the earn-out period has just ended the actual results for the 12 months to 30 September are 
not yet available and accounting confirmation procedures under the sale and purchase agreement have not yet commenced. 
Performance of the acquired business has strengthened over recent months and it is therefore possible that some additional 
consideration could become payable. While a high degree of uncertainty remains, the Directors have accrued £5.0m as an estimate of 
additional consideration potentially payable which has been recognised in the income statement as a non-underlying expense. It is 
anticipated that the determination and settlement of the final amount due will occur during FY19, and any difference between the amount 
provided and the final amount paid will be recognised as a non-underlying expense or credit.

The goodwill of £28.4m arising from the acquisition is attributable to the established store network, workforce, designs and technologies 
of the acquired business and cost savings realised in the combined businesses through economies of scale and other synergies. 

The amounts recognised in respect of the identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed are as set out below:

Recognised amounts of identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed 
Fair value

Property, plant & equipment
Intangible assets – software
Intangible assets – brand name
Inventories
Cash
Trade and other receivables
Trade payables and other liabilities
Fair value lease creditor
Deferred tax

Total identifiable net liabilities
Goodwill

Total consideration

Satisfied by:
Cash consideration
Contingent consideration

Total consideration

Cash consideration
Less: cash and cash equivalent balances acquired

Net cash outflow arising on acquisition

£m

18.7
1.3
13.8
13.1
5.9
5.0
(51.7)
(7.4)
(1.1)

(2.4)
28.4

26.0

26.0
–

26.0

26.0
(5.9)

20.1

Determining the fair value of the identified assets and liabilities required a number of estimates and judgments to be made. In particular, 
the valuation of the intangible asset relating to the Sofology brand name involved estimates of the future performance of the business 
and the determination of an applicable discount rate. A increase in the discount rate of 1% would reduce the value of the brand name 
intangible by £0.5m. The calculation of the fair value lease creditor also required estimates to be made of current market rentals 
applicable to the properties leased by the acquired business.

Acquisition related costs of £2.5 million have been charged as non-underlying administrative expenses in the income statement.

In the period from 1 December 2017 to 28 July 2018, Sofology Limited contributed £122.8m to reported Group revenue and a loss 
before tax of £1.4m. Had Sofology Limited been consolidated from 30 July 2017, reported Group revenue would have been £927.7m, and 
underlying EBITDA would have been £77.7m. Profit before tax, including the costs of shareholder loans and non-underlying items would 
have been £23.1m.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 2018108

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
at 28 July 2018

9 Intangible assets continued
Business combinations
Multiyork
On 27 December 2018 the Group acquired eight store leases and certain assets and intellectual property from Multiyork Furniture 
Limited following that business entering administration. Cash consideration for this transaction, which has been accounted for as a 
business combination, was £1.2m and has been recognised as goodwill. In addition, £0.1m of related acquisition costs have been 
recognised in non-underlying administrative expenses.

10 Investments in subsidiaries
The following companies are incorporated in England and Wales, are wholly owned by the Group and have been consolidated:

Diamond Holdco 2 Limited1
Diamond Holdco 7 Limited1
DFS Furniture Holdings plc1
DFS Furniture Company Limited1
DFS Trading Limited1
Coin Retail Limited (Jersey)2
Coin Furniture Limited3
The Sofa Workshop Limited4
DFS Spain Limited1
Sofology Limited5
C.S Lounge Suites Limited5
Soundsofa Limited5
Loveseats Limited5
Slothworks Limited5
Sofasound Limited5
Sofaworks Limited5
Sleepology Limited5
Sofa Traders Limited5

Registered offices:
1  Rockingham Way, Redhouse Interchange, Adwick-le-Street, Doncaster DN6 7NA
2  13-14 Esplanade, St Helier, Jersey JE1 1BD
3  The Pavilion, 118 Southwark Street, London, SE1 0SW
4  Venture House 4th Floor, 27-29 Glasshouse Street, London W1B 5DF
5  Ashton Road, Golborne, Warrington, WA3 3UL

11 Other financial assets

Non-current 
Foreign exchange contracts

Current
Foreign exchange contracts

Principal activity

Intermediate holding company
Intermediate holding company
Intermediate holding company
Intermediate holding company
Furniture retailer
Intermediate holding company
Furniture retailer
Furniture retailer
Furniture retailer
Furniture retailer
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant

2018
£m

1.6

3.7

2017
£m

–

–

Foreign exchange contracts comprise forward contracts which are used to hedge exchange risk arising from the Group’s overseas 
purchases (note 23).

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018109

12 Deferred tax
Deferred tax assets and liabilities are attributable to the following:

Accelerated capital allowances
Fair value lease creditor
Revaluation of derivatives to fair value
Tax losses carried forward
Brand names
Share based payments
Other temporary differences

Net tax assets

The deferred tax movement in the year is as follows:

At start of period
Credited/(charged) to the income statement:
  Accelerated capital allowances
  Fair value lease creditor
  Tax losses carried forward
  Brand names
  Share based payments
  Other temporary differences
Acquisition of subsidiaries
Recognised in the statement of comprehensive income

At end of period

13 Inventories

Raw materials and consumables
Finished goods and goods for resale

Provision for net realisable value

2018
£m

3.8
5.0
(0.6)
0.9
(2.2)
0.8
0.3

8.0

2018 
£m

9.8

1.1
(0.2)
(0.1)
0.3
0.1
(0.1)
(1.3)
(1.6)

8.0

2018
£m

5.7
56.2

61.9
(7.5)

54.4

2017
£m

2.7
4.0
1.2
1.0
–
0.5
0.4

9.8

2017
£m

9.1

–
(0.3)
0.3
–
0.3
(0.4)
–
0.8

9.8

2017
£m

4.8
37.9

42.7
(6.1)

36.6

In applying its accounting policy for inventory, the Group identifies those items where there is a risk that net realisable value does not 
exceed cost, due to either the age or condition of the item. An estimate of the net realisable value of such items is made based on the 
sale of similar items in the past and their carrying value reduced by an appropriate provision. These estimates are regularly updated and 
during FY18 the required provision was reduced by £1.0m to reflect more recent selling price experience.

14 Trade and other receivables

Trade receivables 
Prepayments and accrued income
Other receivables

2018
£m

7.6
23.2
0.4

31.2

2017
£m

10.4
13.7
0.4

24.5

No interest is charged on trade receivables; the Group bears no credit risk in respect of amounts due from retail customers under 
interest free credit arrangements. Prepayments and accrued income do not include impaired assets.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 2018110

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
at 28 July 2018

15 Trade payables and other liabilities

Current
Payments received on account
Trade payables
Other creditors including other tax and social security
Accruals and deferred income
Finance lease liabilities

Non-current
Fair value lease creditor 
Accruals and deferred income
Finance lease liabilities

2018
£m

37.1
120.4
32.4
35.3
3.3

228.5

2018
£m

25.4
50.3
7.2

82.9

2017
£m

24.9
81.9
29.5
27.2
2.1

165.6

2017
£m

20.0
42.7
4.6

67.3

Trade payables do not bear interest and are paid within agreed credit terms. Property lease incentives are classified as non-current to 
the extent that they will be credited to the income statement more than one year from the reporting date.

On the acquisition of the DFS business by the current parent Company in 2010 and also on the acquisition of Sofology Limited in 2017 a 
number of fair value adjustments were made, including the recognition of a liability representing the present value of certain unfavourable 
lease obligations as assessed at the date of acquisition. This fair value lease creditor is released to the income statement over the 
remaining life of the related leases (expiring in 2030), with the unwind of the discount recognised as a finance expense (note 5).

16 Other financial liabilities

Non-current 
Interest rate derivatives

Current 
Foreign exchange contracts

2018
£m

1.1

0.1

2017
£m

3.5

3.5

Foreign exchange contracts comprise forward contracts which are used to hedge exchange risk arising from the Group’s overseas 
purchases (note 23). Interest rate derivatives are used to hedge interest rate risk on the Group’s floating rate debt (note 23).

17 Other interest-bearing loans and borrowings
This note provides information about the contractual terms of the Group’s interest-bearing loans and borrowings, which are measured at 
amortised cost. For more information about the Group’s exposure to interest rate and foreign currency risk, see note 23.

Senior loan facility
Senior revolving credit facility
Unamortised issue costs

2018
£m

–
197.0
(1.3)

195.7

2017
£m

200.0
–
(1.2)

198.8

On the 7 August 2017 the Group refinanced the senior loan facility with a new senior revolving credit facility of £230.0m of which £197.0m 
was drawn down at 28 July 2018. The revolving credit facility bears interest at a rate of 3 month LIBOR plus 2.35% and is repayable in full 
on 2 August 2022. The revolving credit facility is secured on a first priority basis with fixed and floating charges over substantially all of 
the assets of the Company and DFS Furniture Holdings plc.

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018111

17 Other interest-bearing loans and borrowings continued
Finance lease liabilities
Finance lease liabilities are payable as follows:

Less than one year
Between one and five years
More than five years

2018

2017

Minimum 
lease 
payments
£m

3.7
7.6
–

11.3

Interest
£m

Principal
£m

(0.4)
(0.4)
–

(0.8)

3.3
7.2
–

10.5

Minimum 
lease 
payments
£m

2.3
4.8
–

7.1

Interest
£m

Principal
£m

(0.2)
(0.2)
–

(0.4)

2.1
4.6
–

6.7

18 Employee benefits
Defined contribution pension plans 
The Group operates a number of defined contribution pension plans under which contributions by the employees and the Group are 
administered by trustees in funds separate from the Group’s assets. The costs of these schemes are charged to the income statement 
as they become payable under the rules of the scheme. The total pension cost of the Group for the year was £3.0m (2017: £2.5m).

19 Provisions

Balance at 29 July 2017
Provisions made during the year
Acquisitions
Reclassification from accruals
Provisions used during the year
Provisions released during the year
Unwind of discount

Balance at 28 July 2018

Current
Non-current

Guarantee 
provision
£m

Property 
provisions
£m

Other 
provisions
£m

7.0
4.7
1.5
–
(6.3)
0.6
–

7.5

4.0
3.5

7.5

2.3
0.2
–
–
(0.2)
–
0.1

2.4

0.2
2.2

2.4

1.0
–
–
–
(0.1)
–
–

0.9

0.7
0.2

0.9

Total
£m

10.3
4.9
1.5
–
(6.6)
0.6
0.1

10.8

4.9
5.9

10.8

The Group offers a long-term guarantee on its upholstery products and in accordance with accounting standards a provision is 
maintained for the expected future cost of fulfilling these guarantees on products which have been delivered before the reporting date. In 
calculating this provision the key areas of estimation are the number of future claims, average cost per claim and the expected period 
over which claims will arise (nearly all claims arise within two years of delivery). The Group has considered the sensitivity of the 
calculation to these key areas of estimation, and determined that a 10% change in either the average cost per claim or the number of 
expected future calls would change the value of the calculated provision by £0.6m. The Directors have therefore concluded that 
reasonably possible variations in estimate would not result in a material difference. The release of £0.6m in the year reflects an update of 
the assumptions following an improvement in claims rates. 

Property provisions relate to onerous contracts and other obligations in respect of the Group’s property leases including an estimate of 
dilapidation costs based on anticipated lease expiries and renewals. Other provisions relate to payment of refunds to customers for 
payment protection insurance policies and other regulatory costs.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 2018112

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
at 28 July 2018

20 Dividends
The following dividends were recognised and paid during the year:

Final ordinary dividend for FY16
Interim ordinary dividend for FY17
Special dividend for FY17
Final ordinary dividend for FY17
Interim ordinary dividend for FY18

Pence per
ordinary 
share

6.2p
3.5p
9.5p
7.5p
3.7p

2018
£m

–
–
–
15.9
7.8

23.7

2017
£m

15.9
7.8
20.1
–
–

43.8

The Directors recommend a final dividend of 7.5p per share in respect of the financial period ended 28 July 2018 (“FY18”), resulting in a 
total proposed dividend of £15.9m. Subject to shareholder approval it is intended that this dividend will be paid on 27 December 2018. 
DFS Furniture plc shares will trade ex-dividend from 6 December 2018 and the record date will be 7 December 2018. This dividend has 
not therefore been recognised as a liability in these financial statements.

21 Capital and reserves
Share capital

Ordinary shares of £1.50 each

Allotted, called up and fully paid
At the start and end of the financial period

Number of 
shares
‘000

Ordinary 
shares
£m

213,030

319.5

Share premium
The share premium account represents the surplus of consideration received for issued ordinary share capital over its nominal value. 
This arose on the issue ordinary shares on 11 March 2015.

Merger reserve
The merger reserve arose on the issue of shares in the Company in exchange for minority interests in the issued share capital of a 
subsidiary company on 10 March 2015.

Treasury shares
Where the Company purchases the Company’s equity share capital into treasury (treasury shares), the consideration paid, including any 
directly attributable incremental costs is deducted from equity attributable to the Company’s equity holders until the shares are 
cancelled, reissued or disposed of.

During the period ending 30 July 2016 the Company purchased 1,500,000 of its own ordinary shares at a total cost of £3.7m for the 
purpose of satisfying employee share based payment awards. During the year 130,729 of these shares (2017: 858) were used to satisfy 
employee share based payment awards.

Cash flow hedging reserve
The cash flow hedging reserve comprises the effective portion of the cumulative net change in the fair value of cash flow hedging 
instruments related to hedged transactions that have not yet occurred. 

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018113

22 Financial instruments: categories and fair value

Financial assets
Derivatives in designated hedging relationships
Loans and receivables
Cash

Financial liabilities
Derivatives in designated hedging relationships
Senior loan facility
Senior revolving credit facility
Amortised cost
Finance lease obligations

2018
£m

5.3
8.0
47.2

2017
£m

–
10.8
61.0

(1.2)
–
(195.7)
(216.8)
(10.5)

(7.0)
(198.8)
–
(162.1)
(6.7)

All derivatives are categorised as Level 2 under the requirements of IFRS 7 as they are valued using techniques based significantly on 
observed market data.

The Directors consider that the fair values of each category of the Group’s financial instruments are the same as their carrying values in 
the Group’s balance sheet.

23 Financial instruments: risk management
The objectives, policies and processes governing the treasury activities of the Group are reviewed and approved by the Board. The 
Group’s documented treasury policy includes details of authorised counterparties, instrument types and transaction limits and principles 
for the management of liquidity, interest and foreign exchange risks. As part of its strategy for the management of these risks the Group 
uses derivative financial instruments. The Group does not enter into or trade financial instruments, including derivative financial 
instruments, for speculative purposes.

Liquidity risk
The Group manages its cash and borrowing requirements to ensure that it has sufficient liquid resources to meet its obligations as they 
fall due while making efficient use of the Group’s financial resources.

The table below shows the maturity analysis of the undiscounted remaining contractual cash flows (including interest) of the Group’s 
financial liabilities:

2018

Trade and other payables
Finance lease liabilities
Senior revolving credit facility
Other liabilities

Derivatives: net settled
Derivatives: gross settled
Cash in flows
Cash out flows

Total cash flows

Less than
1 year
£m

206.0
3.7
6.0
4.8

220.5

1.1

(125.5)
120.9

217.0

1 to 2
years
£m

–
3.3
6.0
3.9

13.2

0.7

(49.2)
46.6

2 to 5
years
£m

–
4.3
209.8
0.6

214.7

–

–
–

Over
5 years
£m

–
–
–
2.3

2.3

–

–
–

Total
£m

206.0
11.3
221.8
11.6

450.7

1.8

(174.7)
167.5

11.3

214.7

2.3

445.3

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 2018114

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
at 28 July 2018

23 Financial instruments: risk management continued
Liquidity risk continued

2017

Trade and other payables
Finance lease liabilities
Senior loan facility
Other liabilities

Derivatives: net settled
Derivatives: gross settled
Cash inflows
Cash out flows

Total cash flows

Less than 
1 year
£m

151.8
2.3
4.6
5.0

163.7

1.8

(95.4)
98.2

168.3

1 to 2
years
£m

–
1.9
4.6
3.3

9.8

1.7

–
–

2 to 5
years
£m

–
2.9
203.4
0.6

206.9

1.2

–
–

Over
 5 years
£m

–
–
–
2.3

2.3

–

–
–

Total
£m

151.8
7.1
212.6
11.2

382.7

4.7

(95.4)
98.2

11.5

208.1

2.3

390.2

Interest rate risk management
The Group’s operating profit is affected by the cost of providing interest free credit to its customers. A fall in LIBOR rates would have a 
positive impact on operating profit and a rise in LIBOR rates would impact operating profit negatively. However, with the current low 
LIBOR rates any increases or decreases at present would largely be mitigated by the LIBOR ‘floor’ mechanisms used by the external 
providers of credit to the Group’s customers. Excluding the effect of these floors, an increase in LIBOR of one percentage point would 
reduce the Group’s reported revenue by 0.5%.

The Group is exposed to interest rate risk on its senior revolving credit facility, which bears interest at a floating rate of 3 month GBP 
LIBOR plus 2.35%. In order to provide some certainty over the future cash flows associated with this debt, the Group has in place four 
participating interest rate swaps and caps. The effect of these instruments is to fix the interest rate payable on the senior revolving credit 
facility to a maximum level while allowing the Group to retain some benefit on a proportion of the facility where LIBOR remained below 
1.39%. The fair values of the Group’s interest rate derivatives are as follows:

Interest rate swaps
Derivatives in designated hedging relationships

2018
£m

2017
£m

(1.1)

(3.5)

Foreign exchange risk management
The Group is exposed to the risks of exchange rate fluctuations on the purchase of products denominated in foreign currencies. 
Currency requirements are assessed by analysis of historic purchasing patterns by month, adjusted as appropriate to take into account 
current trading expectations. The Group’s treasury policy allows for the use of forward foreign exchange contracts to hedge the 
exchange rate risk arising from these anticipated future purchases up to 18 months in advance. These contracts are designated as cash 
flow hedges.

The table below summarises the forward foreign exchange contracts outstanding at the period end:

Derivatives in designated hedging relationships
US Dollar

2018

2017

Notional 
amount
£m

Fair value
£m

Notional 
amount
£m

Fair value
£m

167.5

5.2

98.2

(3.5)

The carrying amounts of the Group’s foreign currency denominated monetary assets and monetary liabilities at the reporting date are 
as follows:

US Dollar
Euro

Assets

Liabilities

2018
£m

8.2
4.0

2017
£m

7.3
3.5

2018
£m

(7.6)
(1.6)

2017
£m

(5.9)
(1.0)

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018115

23 Financial instruments: risk management continued
Foreign currency sensitivity analysis
The Group’s primary foreign currency exposures are to US Dollars and the Euro. The table below illustrates the hypothetical sensitivity of  
the Group’s reported profit and closing equity to a 10% weakening of these currencies against Sterling, assuming all other variables were 
unchanged. The sensitivity rate of 10% represents the Directors’ assessment of a reasonably possible change, based on historic volatility. 

The analysis includes only outstanding foreign currency denominated monetary items and adjusts their translation at the period end for a 
10% change in foreign currency rates. The analysis assumes that exchange rate fluctuations on currency derivatives that form part of an 
effective cash flow hedge relationship affect the cash flow hedging reserve in equity.

Positive figures represent an increase in profit or equity.

US Dollar
Euro

Income statement

Equity

2018
£m

(0.1)
(0.2)

2017
£m

(0.1)
(0.3)

2018
£m

(17.3)
–

2017
£m

(9.5)
–

A 10% strengthening of the above currencies against the Sterling at the period end would have had the equal but opposite effect on the 
above currencies to the amounts shown above, on the basis that all other variables remain constant.

Financial risk management 
Credit risk is the risk of financial loss to the Group if a customer or counterparty to a financial instrument fails to meet its contractual 
obligations, and arises principally from the Group’s investment securities.

Investments of cash, borrowings and derivative instruments are transacted only through counterparties meeting the credit rating and 
investment criteria specified in the Group’s treasury policy. The Group’s exposure and the credit ratings of its counterparties are regularly 
reviewed. Concentrations of risk are mitigated through the use of multiple counterparties and by counterparty limits which are reviewed 
and approved by the Board.

The Group does not have any significant credit risk exposure to any single counterparty or any group of counterparties having 
similar characteristics.

Capital management
The capital structure of the Group consists of debt, as analysed in note 26, and equity attributable to the equity holders of the parent 
Company, comprising issued capital, reserves and retained earnings as shown in the consolidated statement of changes in equity. The 
Group manages its capital with the objective that all entities within the Group continue as going concerns while maintaining an efficient 
structure to minimise the cost of capital. The Group is not restricted by any externally imposed capital requirements.

24 Share based payments
The Group has three share based payment schemes in operation:

Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP)
The LTIP is a discretionary executive reward plan that allows the Group to grant conditional share awards or nil-cost options to selected 
executives at the discretion of the Remuneration Committee. The scheme is focused on the senior leadership roles in the Group, 
including Executive Directors. The maximum value of LTIP awards granted to an individual is 150% of base salary, although the 
Remuneration Committee may in exceptional circumstances increase this to 300%.

LTIP awards vest after a three year performance period (other than those granted shortly after Admission which vested on 31 July 2017) 
subject to the achievement of performance measures based on earnings per share and total shareholder return targets. Further information 
on LTIP performance targets and awards made to Directors is given in the Directors’ Remuneration Report on pages 58 to 82.

Restricted Share Plan (RSP)
The RSP is also a discretionary reward plan under which conditional share awards or nil-cost options may be granted to individuals in 
key executive roles in the Group, excluding Executive Directors and other recipients of LTIP awards. Awards may not exceed 50% of an 
individual’s salary for a particular financial year.

RSP awards typically vest after a three year performance period (other than those granted shortly after Admission which vested on 31 
July 2017) and are not subject to other performance conditions. During FY18 supplementary RSP awards with a two year vesting period 
were made to members of the executive management team.

Save as Your Earn (SAYE)
SAYE schemes are currently available to all employees in the UK and Republic of Ireland, with invitations to participate generally issued 
on an annual basis and subject to HMRC rules. The current maximum monthly savings limit for the schemes is £500. Options are 
granted at the prevailing market rate less a discount of 20% and vest three years from the date of grant.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 2018116

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
at 28 July 2018

24 Share based payments continued
The movements in outstanding awards under each of the schemes are summarised below. During the year 127,170 RSP awards vested 
and were exercised and 419,796 LTIP awards reached their vesting date but lapsed as none of the performance conditions for vesting 
were met. At 28 July 2018 no outstanding awards were exercisable. 

Outstanding at the beginning of the year
Granted
Forfeited
Lapsed
Exercised
Cancelled

Outstanding at the end of the year

Weighted average remaining contractual life (months)

LTIP
No.

1,468,870
826,761
(19,706)
(419,796)
–
–

RSP
No.

SAYE
No.

1,536,797
1,816,599
(124,032)
–
(127,197)
–

2,773,856
1,527,079
(63,095)
–
(3,532)
(1,560,501)

1,856,129

3,102,167

2,673,807

18.5

20.6

22.7

Fair value calculations
The LTIP, RSP and SAYE awards are all accounted for as equity-settled under IFRS 2. The fair value of LTIP awards which are subject to 
a market based performance condition (total shareholder return) is calculated using a stochastic (Monte Carlo) option pricing model. RSP 
awards, SAYE awards and LTIP awards subject to a non-market based performance condition (earnings per share) are valued using a 
Black-Scholes option pricing model. The inputs to these models for awards granted during the financial period are detailed below:

Grant date
Share price at date of grant
Exercise price
Volatility
Expected life
Risk free rate
Dividend yield

LTIP

RSP

RSP

SAYE

16 November 2017
£1.90
Nil
31.0%
3 years
0.5%
–1

16 November 2017
£1.90
Nil
–2
2 years
–2
5.9%

16 November 2017
£1.90
Nil
–2
3 years
–2
5.9%

6 December 2017
£2.01
£1.61
24.0%
3.1 years
0.5%
5.9%

Fair value per share
Market-based performance conditions
Non-market based or no performance condition

£0.70/£0.74
£1.90

–
£1.68

–
£1.59

–
£0.32

1.  LTIP participants are entitled to receive dividend equivalents on unvested awards therefore dividend yield does not impact the fair value calculation
2.  Volatility and risk free rates do not impact the fair value calculation for awards with no exercise price or market based performance condition

As the Company had only limited share price history at the date of grant, expected volatility was based on a proxy volatility determined 
from the median volatility of a group of appropriate comparator companies within the FTSE All Share index. Expected life has been 
assumed to equate to the vesting period of the awards.

The total share based payment expense included in administration costs in respect of the above schemes was £2.8m (2017: £2.0m). 

25 Operating leases
Non-cancellable operating lease rentals are payable as follows:

Less than one year
Between one and five years
More than five years

2018
£m

84.1
315.0
342.8

741.9

2017
£m

64.6
247.5
333.9

646.0

The Group has entered into operating leases in respect of stores, warehouses and equipment. These non-cancellable leases have 
remaining terms of between 3 months and 17 years. The majority of the Group’s operating leases provide for their renewal by mutual 
agreement at the expiry of the lease term.

During the year £74.2m was recognised as an expense in the income statement in respect of operating leases (2017: £61.6m).  
At 28 July 2018, future rentals receivable under non-cancellable leases where the Group is the lessor were £8.7m (2017: £11.8m).

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018117

2017
£m

61.0

61.0
(198.8)
–
(6.7)

(144.5)

Cash flow
£m

Acquisitions
£m

(19.7)

(19.7)
200.0
(197.0)
3.1

(13.6)

5.9

5.9
–
–
(1.8)

4.1

Other 
non-cash 
changes
£m

–

–
(1.2)
1.3
(5.1)

(5.0)

2018
£m

47.2

47.2
–
(195.7)
(10.5)

(159.0)

26 Net debt

Cash in hand, at bank

Cash and cash equivalents
Senior loan facility
Senior revolving credit facility
Finance lease liabilities

Total net debt

27 Related parties
Key management personnel

At 28 July 2018, Directors of the Company held 0.8% of its issued ordinary share capital (2017: 0.8%), and a further 0.2% (2017: 0.2%) 
was held by other key management personnel.

The compensation of key management personnel (including the Directors) is as follows:

Emoluments
Company contributions to money purchase schemes

2018
£m

2.7
0.1

2.8

2017
£m

2.6
0.1

2.7

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 2018118

Company balance sheet
at 28 July 2018

Fixed assets
  Investments 
Current assets
  Amounts due from Group companies
Current liabilities
  Amounts due to Group companies

Net assets

Capital and reserves 
  Called up share capital
  Share premium
  Merger reserve
  Treasury shares
  Retained earnings

Equity shareholders’ funds

Note

2018 
£m

2017
£m

29

30

31

32
32
32
32

241.5

238.7

293.0

198.0

(71.2)

(47.5)

463.3

389.2

319.5
40.4
18.6
(3.3)
88.1

319.5
40.4
18.6
(3.7)
14.4

463.3

389.2

These financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors on 3 October 2018 and were signed on its behalf by:

Ian Filby  
Chief Executive Officer 

Nicola Bancroft
Chief Financial Officer

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018 
 
 
 
 
 
 
119

Company statement of changes in equity
at 28 July 2018

Balance at 30 July 2016

Profit for the year
Other comprehensive income/(expense)

Total comprehensive expense for the year
Dividends
Share based payments

Balance at 29 July 2017

Profit for the year
Other comprehensive income/(expense)

Total comprehensive income/(expense) for the year

Dividends
Treasury shares issued
Share based payments

Balance at 28 July 2018

Share
capital
£m

319.5

Share 
premium
£m

40.4

Merger 
reserve
£m

18.6

Treasury 
shares
£m

Retained
earnings
£m

Total
equity
£m

(3.7)

56.2

431.0

–
–

–
–
–

–
–

–
–
–

–
–

–
–
–

–
–

–
–
–

319.5

40.4

18.6

(3.7)

–
–

–

–
–
–

–
–

–

–
–
–

–
–

–

–
–
–

–
–

–

–
0.4
–

319.5

40.4

18.6

(3.3)

–
–

–
(43.8)
2.0

14.4

95.0
–

95.0

(23.7)
(0.4)
2.8

88.1

–
–

–
(43.8)
2.0

389.2

95.0
–

95.0

(23.7)
–
2.8

463.3

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 2018120

Notes to the company financial statements
at 28 July 2018

28 Accounting policies
Basis of preparation
The financial statements are prepared in accordance with Financial Reporting Standard 101 Reduced Disclosure Framework (“FRS 101”).

In these financial statements the Company has applied the exemption available under FRS101 in respect of the following disclosures:
•  a cash flow statement and related notes
•  comparative period reconciliations
•  disclosures in respect of transactions with wholly owned subsidiaries
•  disclosures in respect of capital management
•  the impact of new but not yet effective IFRSs

As the consolidated accounts of the Company include the equivalent disclosures, the Company has also taken the exemption available 
under FRS 1010 in respect of IFRS 2 Share Based Payments disclosures of group settled share based payments. Under Section 408 of 
the Companies Act 2006, the Company is not required to present its own profit and loss account. The Company’s profit for the period 
was £95.0m (2017: £nil).

The Company proposes to continue to adopt the reduced disclosure framework of FRS 101 in its next financial statements.

The accounting policies set out below have, unless otherwise stated, been applied consistently to all periods presented in these 
financial statements.

Going concern
The Company heads a Group which is highly cash generative, with sufficient medium and long term facilities in place to enable it to meet 
its obligations as they fall due. The directors are therefore satisfied that the Company will be able to continue in operational existence, as 
detailed in the Group’s Viability Statement on page 17, and have therefore continued to prepare the Company’s financial statements on 
the going concern basis.

Investments
Investments are stated at cost, less provision for any impairment.

Amounts due from and to Group companies
Amounts receivable from or payable to other companies within the Company’s Group are recognised initially at fair value and 
subsequently measured at amortised cost less any provision for impairment.

Taxation
Tax on the profit or loss for the year comprises current and deferred tax. Tax is recognised in the income statement except to the extent 
that it relates to a business combination, or items recognised directly in equity or other comprehensive income. Deferred tax is provided 
on temporary differences between the carrying amounts if assets and liabilities for financial reporting purposes and the amounts used 
for taxation purposes.

Share based payments
Awards (options or conditional shares) granted by the Company over its own shares to the employees of subsidiary companies are 
recognised in the Company’s own financial statements as an increase in the cost of investment in subsidiaries. The amount recognised 
is equivalent to the equity-settled share based payment charge recognised in the consolidated financial statements. The corresponding 
credit is recognised directly in equity.

Treasury shares
Where the Company purchases the Company’s equity share capital into treasury (treasury shares), the consideration paid, including any 
directly attributable incremental costs is deducted from equity attributable to the Company’s equity holders until the shares are 
cancelled, reissued or disposed of.

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018121

29 Investments

Cost and net book value
At the start of the financial period
Additions

At the end of the financial period

Shares in subsidiary 
undertakings

2018
£m

2017
£m

238.7
2.8

241.5

236.7
2.0

238.7

Details of the Company’s investments are given in note 10. Additions in the current and prior year relate to capital contributions made in 
respect of share based payments schemes for the Group’s employees.

30 Debtors

Amounts due from subsidiary undertakings

31 Creditors: amounts due in less than one year

Amounts due to subsidiary undertakings

32 Capital and reserves
Share capital

Allotted, called up and fully paid
Amounts due to subsidiary undertakings

2018
£m

2017
£m

293.0

198.0

2018
£m

71.2

2017
£m

47.5

Number of 
shares
‘000

Ordinary 
shares
£m

213,030

319.5

Share premium
The share premium account represents the surplus of consideration received for issued ordinary share capital over its nominal value. 
This arose on the issue ordinary shares on 11 March 2015.

Merger reserve
The merger reserve arose on the issue of shares in the Company in exchange for minority interests in the issued share capital of a 
subsidiary company on 10 March 2015.

Treasury shares
Where the Company purchases the Company’s equity share capital into treasury (treasury shares), the consideration paid, including any 
directly attributable incremental costs is deducted from equity attributable to the Company’s equity holders until the shares are 
cancelled, reissued or disposed of. 

During the period ending 30 July 2016 the Company purchased 1,500,000 of its own ordinary shares at a total cost of £3.7m for the 
purpose of satisfying employee share based payment awards. During the year 130,729 of these shares (2017: 858) were used to satisfy 
employee share based payment awards.

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 2018122

Financial history

FY181

FY17

1,125.6

870.5

990.8

762.7

76.1

25.8

8.9

11.2

–

–

82.4

50.1

18.7

11.2

9.5

–

FY16

980.4

756.0

94.4

64.5

28.3

11.0

–

3.7

FY152

913.1

706.1

89.2

10.7

4.3

9.3

–

–

+1.9

+6.5

–21.5

+11.8

£m

£m

£m

£m

p

p

p

£m

%

Gross sales

Revenue

Underlying EBITDA

Profit before tax

Basic earnings per share

Ordinary dividends per share

Special dividends per share

Purchase of own shares

Total shareholder return

Notes
1.  Sofology acquired 30 November 2017
2. 

IPO 10 March 2015

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018123

Shareholder information

Contacts

Chief Executive Officer
Ian Filby

Chief Financial Officer
Nicola Bancroft

Group Company Secretary
Elizabeth McDonald

Investor relations
Mike Schmidt

Corporate website
www.dfscorporate.co.uk

Registered office
DFS Furniture plc 
1 Rockingham Way
Redhouse Interchange 
Adwick-le-Street 
Doncaster
DN6 7NA

Corporate advisers:

Auditor
KPMG LLP
1 Sovereign Square
Sovereign Street
Leeds
LS1 4DA

Remuneration adviser
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP
Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditors 
Embankment Place London 
WC2N 6RH

Brokers
UBS Limited & Jefferies International Limited

Shareholder enquiries
The Company’s registrar is Equiniti. They will be pleased to deal 
with any questions regarding your shareholding or dividends. 
Please notify them of your change of address or other personal 
information. Their address details are:

Equiniti
Aspect House
Spencer Road
Lancing
West Sussex  
BN99 6DA

Equiniti is a trading name of Equiniti Limited.

Equiniti helpline: 0371 384 2030.  
Overseas holders should contact +44 (0)121 415 7047.

Lines are open 8.30am to 5.30pm, Monday to Friday  
(excluding public holidays).

Shareholders are able to manage their shareholding online and 
facilities include electronic communications, account enquiries, 
amendment of address and dividend mandate instructions.

For institutional investor enquiries, please contact: 
FTI Consulting
200 Aldersgate
Aldersgate Street London
EC1A 4HD
+44 (0)20 3727 1000

Annual General Meeting 2018
This year’s AGM will be held at 2.30pm on 30 November 2018 at 
DFS Head Office, 1 Rockingham Way, Redhouse Interchange, 
Adwick-le-Street, Doncaster, DN6 7NA

Financial calendar
FY18 full year results  
Annual General Meeting  
Record date for FY18 final dividend  
Payment date for FY18 final dividend 
FY19 half year results  
Payment date for FY19 interim dividend 

4 October 2018
30 November 2018
8 December 2018
27 December 2018
March 2019
June 2019

SRCGFSDFS Annual report & accounts 2018124

Notes

DFS Annual report & accounts 2018DFS Furniture plc

1 Rockingham Way
Redhouse Interchange
Adwick-le-Street
Doncaster
DN6 7NA

www.dfscorporate.co.uk
www.dfs.co.uk

Report and Accounts
Registered number 7236769
28 July 2018